[BACK]Return to pkgsrc.txt CVS log [TXT][DIR] Up to [cvs.NetBSD.org] / pkgsrc / doc

Annotation of pkgsrc/doc/pkgsrc.txt, Revision 1.51

1.1       grant       1: The pkgsrc guide
                      2:
1.2       hubertf     3: Documentation on the NetBSD packages system
1.1       grant       4:
                      5: Alistair Crooks
                      6:
                      7: <agc@NetBSD.org>
                      8:
                      9: Hubert Feyrer
                     10:
                     11: <hubertf@NetBSD.org>
                     12:
1.3       hubertf    13: The pkgsrc Developers
1.2       hubertf    14:
1.48      dillo      15: Copyright (C) 1994-2005 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc
1.1       grant      16:
1.48      dillo      17: $NetBSD: pkgsrc.xml,v 1.10 2005/10/05 13:59:56 dillo Exp $
1.1       grant      18:
                     19: Abstract
                     20:
                     21: Information about using the NetBSD package system (pkgsrc) from both a user
                     22: view for installing packages as well as from a pkgsrc developers' view for
                     23: creating new packages.
                     24:
                     25: -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                     26:
                     27: Table of Contents
                     28:
1.51    ! rillig     29: 1. What is pkgsrc?
1.20      ben        30:
1.1       grant      31:     1.1. Introduction
                     32:     1.2. Overview
                     33:     1.3. Terminology
                     34:     1.4. Typography
1.20      ben        35:
1.46      gdt        36: I. The pkgsrc user's guide
1.20      ben        37:
1.1       grant      38:     2. Where to get pkgsrc
1.20      ben        39:
1.1       grant      40:         2.1. As tar file
                     41:         2.2. Via SUP
                     42:         2.3. Via CVS
1.20      ben        43:
1.1       grant      44:     3. Using pkgsrc on systems other than NetBSD
1.20      ben        45:
1.1       grant      46:         3.1. Bootstrapping pkgsrc
1.47      reed       47:         3.2. Platform-specific notes
1.20      ben        48:
1.1       grant      49:             3.2.1. Darwin (Mac OS X)
                     50:             3.2.2. FreeBSD
                     51:             3.2.3. Interix
                     52:             3.2.4. IRIX
1.22      tv         53:             3.2.5. Linux
                     54:             3.2.6. OpenBSD
                     55:             3.2.7. Solaris
1.20      ben        56:
1.1       grant      57:     4. Using pkgsrc
1.20      ben        58:
1.1       grant      59:         4.1. Working with binary packages
1.20      ben        60:
1.1       grant      61:             4.1.1. Where to get binary packages
                     62:             4.1.2. How to use binary packages
                     63:             4.1.3. A word of warning
1.20      ben        64:
1.1       grant      65:         4.2. Building packages from source
1.20      ben        66:
1.1       grant      67:             4.2.1. Requirements
                     68:             4.2.2. Fetching distfiles
                     69:             4.2.3. How to build and install
                     70:             4.2.4. Selecting the compiler
1.20      ben        71:
1.38      dillo      72:     5. Configuring pkgsrc
1.20      ben        73:
1.45      wiz        74:         5.1. General configuration
                     75:         5.2. Variables affecting the build process
                     76:         5.3. Developer/advanced settings
                     77:         5.4. Selecting Build Options
1.38      dillo      78:
                     79:     6. Creating binary packages
                     80:
                     81:         6.1. Building a single binary package
                     82:         6.2. Settings for creation of binary packages
                     83:         6.3. Doing a bulk build of all packages
                     84:
                     85:             6.3.1. Configuration
                     86:             6.3.2. Other environmental considerations
                     87:             6.3.3. Operation
                     88:             6.3.4. What it does
                     89:             6.3.5. Disk space requirements
1.47      reed       90:             6.3.6. Setting up a sandbox for chrooted builds
1.38      dillo      91:             6.3.7. Building a partial set of packages
                     92:             6.3.8. Uploading results of a bulk build
                     93:
                     94:         6.4. Creating a multiple CD-ROM packages collection
                     95:
                     96:             6.4.1. Example of cdpack
                     97:
                     98:     7. Frequently Asked Questions
                     99:
                    100:         7.1. Are there any mailing lists for pkg-related discussion?
                    101:         7.2. Where's the pkgviews documentation?
                    102:         7.3. Utilities for package management (pkgtools)
                    103:         7.4. How to use pkgsrc as non-root
                    104:         7.5. How to resume transfers when fetching distfiles?
                    105:         7.6. How can I install/use XFree86 from pkgsrc?
                    106:         7.7. How can I install/use X.org from pkgsrc?
                    107:         7.8. How to fetch files from behind a firewall
                    108:         7.9. How do I tell make fetch to do passive FTP?
                    109:         7.10. How to fetch all distfiles at once
                    110:         7.11. What does "Don't know how to make /usr/share/tmac/tmac.andoc"
1.14      xtraeme   111:             mean?
1.38      dillo     112:         7.12. What does "Could not find bsd.own.mk" mean?
                    113:         7.13. Using 'sudo' with pkgsrc
                    114:         7.14. How do I change the location of configuration files?
                    115:         7.15. Automated security checks
1.20      ben       116:
1.46      gdt       117: II. The pkgsrc developer's guide
1.20      ben       118:
1.38      dillo     119:     8. Package components - files, directories and contents
1.20      ben       120:
1.38      dillo     121:         8.1. Makefile
                    122:         8.2. distinfo
                    123:         8.3. patches/*
                    124:         8.4. Other mandatory files
                    125:         8.5. Optional files
                    126:         8.6. work*
                    127:         8.7. files/*
1.20      ben       128:
1.38      dillo     129:     9. Programming in Makefiles
1.27      rillig    130:
1.38      dillo     131:         9.1. Makefile variables
1.27      rillig    132:
1.38      dillo     133:             9.1.1. Naming conventions
1.27      rillig    134:
1.38      dillo     135:         9.2. Code snippets
1.27      rillig    136:
1.38      dillo     137:             9.2.1. Adding things to a list
                    138:             9.2.2. Converting an internal list into an external list
                    139:             9.2.3. Passing variables to a shell command
                    140:             9.2.4. Quoting guideline
                    141:             9.2.5. Workaround for a bug in BSD Make
1.20      ben       142:
1.38      dillo     143:     10. PLIST issues
1.20      ben       144:
1.38      dillo     145:         10.1. RCS ID
                    146:         10.2. Semi-automatic PLIST generation
                    147:         10.3. Tweaking output of make print-PLIST
                    148:         10.4. Variable substitution in PLIST
1.48      dillo     149:         10.5. Man page compression
1.38      dillo     150:         10.6. Changing PLIST source with PLIST_SRC
1.47      reed      151:         10.7. Platform-specific and differing PLISTs
1.38      dillo     152:         10.8. Sharing directories between packages
1.20      ben       153:
1.38      dillo     154:     11. Buildlink methodology
1.20      ben       155:
1.38      dillo     156:         11.1. Converting packages to use buildlink3
                    157:         11.2. Writing buildlink3.mk files
1.20      ben       158:
1.38      dillo     159:             11.2.1. Anatomy of a buildlink3.mk file
                    160:             11.2.2. Updating BUILDLINK_DEPENDS.pkg in buildlink3.mk files
1.20      ben       161:
1.38      dillo     162:         11.3. Writing builtin.mk files
1.20      ben       163:
1.38      dillo     164:             11.3.1. Anatomy of a builtin.mk file
                    165:             11.3.2. Global preferences for native or pkgsrc software
1.20      ben       166:
1.38      dillo     167:     12. The pkginstall framework
1.20      ben       168:
1.38      dillo     169:         12.1. Files and directories outside the installation prefix
1.20      ben       170:
1.38      dillo     171:             12.1.1. Directory manipulation
                    172:             12.1.2. File manipulation
1.20      ben       173:
1.38      dillo     174:         12.2. Configuration files
1.35      jmmv      175:
1.38      dillo     176:             12.2.1. How PKG_SYSCONFDIR is set
1.47      reed      177:             12.2.2. Telling the software where configuration files are
1.38      dillo     178:             12.2.3. Patching installations
                    179:             12.2.4. Disabling handling of configuration files
1.35      jmmv      180:
1.38      dillo     181:         12.3. System startup scripts
1.35      jmmv      182:
1.38      dillo     183:             12.3.1. Disabling handling of system startup scripts
1.35      jmmv      184:
1.38      dillo     185:         12.4. System users and groups
                    186:         12.5. System shells
1.35      jmmv      187:
1.38      dillo     188:             12.5.1. Disabling handling of configuration files
1.35      jmmv      189:
1.38      dillo     190:     13. Options handling
1.35      jmmv      191:
1.38      dillo     192:         13.1. Global default options
                    193:         13.2. Converting packages to use bsd.options.mk
1.48      dillo     194:         13.3. Option Names
1.35      jmmv      195:
1.38      dillo     196:     14. The build process
1.35      jmmv      197:
1.38      dillo     198:         14.1. Program location
                    199:         14.2. Main targets
                    200:         14.3. Other helpful targets
1.35      jmmv      201:
1.38      dillo     202:     15. Notes on fixes for packages
1.35      jmmv      203:
1.38      dillo     204:         15.1. General operation
1.35      jmmv      205:
1.38      dillo     206:             15.1.1. How to pull in variables from /etc/mk.conf
                    207:             15.1.2. Where to install documentation
                    208:             15.1.3. Restricted packages
                    209:             15.1.4. Handling dependencies
                    210:             15.1.5. Handling conflicts with other packages
                    211:             15.1.6. Packages that cannot or should not be built
                    212:             15.1.7. Packages which should not be deleted, once installed
                    213:             15.1.8. Handling packages with security problems
                    214:             15.1.9. How to handle compiler bugs
                    215:             15.1.10. How to handle incrementing versions when fixing an
1.31      wiz       216:                 existing package
1.38      dillo     217:             15.1.11. Portability of packages
1.20      ben       218:
1.38      dillo     219:         15.2. Possible downloading issues
1.20      ben       220:
1.38      dillo     221:             15.2.1. Packages whose distfiles aren't available for plain
1.1       grant     222:                 downloading
1.38      dillo     223:             15.2.2. How to handle modified distfiles with the 'old' name
1.20      ben       224:
1.38      dillo     225:         15.3. Configuration gotchas
1.20      ben       226:
1.38      dillo     227:             15.3.1. Shared libraries - libtool
                    228:             15.3.2. Using libtool on GNU packages that already support libtool
                    229:             15.3.3. GNU Autoconf/Automake
                    230:
                    231:         15.4. Building considerations
                    232:
                    233:             15.4.1. CPP defines
1.51    ! rillig    234:             15.4.2. Getting a list of CPP defines
1.38      dillo     235:
                    236:         15.5. Package specific actions
                    237:
                    238:             15.5.1. User interaction
                    239:             15.5.2. Handling licenses
                    240:             15.5.3. Installing score files
                    241:             15.5.4. Packages containing perl scripts
                    242:             15.5.5. Packages with hardcoded paths to other interpreters
                    243:             15.5.6. Packages installing perl modules
                    244:             15.5.7. Packages installing info files
                    245:             15.5.8. Packages installing GConf2 data files
                    246:             15.5.9. Packages installing scrollkeeper data files
                    247:             15.5.10. Packages installing X11 fonts
                    248:             15.5.11. Packages installing GTK2 modules
                    249:             15.5.12. Packages installing SGML or XML data
                    250:             15.5.13. Packages installing extensions to the MIME database
                    251:             15.5.14. Packages using intltool
                    252:             15.5.15. Packages installing startup scripts
                    253:
                    254:         15.6. Feedback to the author
                    255:
                    256:     16. Debugging
                    257:     17. Submitting and Committing
                    258:
                    259:         17.1. Submitting your packages
1.41      wiz       260:         17.2. General notes when adding, updating, or removing packages
                    261:         17.3. Committing: Importing a package into CVS
                    262:         17.4. Updating a package to a newer version
                    263:         17.5. Moving a package in pkgsrc
1.20      ben       264:
1.46      gdt       265: A. A simple example package: bison
1.20      ben       266:
1.46      gdt       267:     A.1. files
1.20      ben       268:
1.46      gdt       269:         A.1.1. Makefile
                    270:         A.1.2. DESCR
                    271:         A.1.3. PLIST
                    272:         A.1.4. Checking a package with pkglint
1.20      ben       273:
1.46      gdt       274:     A.2. Steps for building, installing, packaging
1.20      ben       275:
1.46      gdt       276: B. Build logs
1.20      ben       277:
1.46      gdt       278:     B.1. Building figlet
                    279:     B.2. Packaging figlet
1.20      ben       280:
1.46      gdt       281: C. Layout of the FTP server's package archive
                    282: D. Editing guidelines for the pkgsrc guide
1.20      ben       283:
1.46      gdt       284:     D.1. Targets
                    285:     D.2. Procedure
1.20      ben       286:
1.51    ! rillig    287: Chapter 1. What is pkgsrc?
1.1       grant     288:
                    289: Table of Contents
                    290:
                    291: 1.1. Introduction
                    292: 1.2. Overview
                    293: 1.3. Terminology
                    294: 1.4. Typography
                    295:
                    296: 1.1. Introduction
                    297:
1.47      reed      298: There is a lot of software freely available for Unix-based systems, which
1.1       grant     299: usually runs on NetBSD and other Unix-flavoured systems, too, sometimes with
                    300: some modifications. The NetBSD Packages Collection (pkgsrc) incorporates any
                    301: such changes necessary to make that software run, and makes the installation
                    302: (and de-installation) of the software package easy by means of a single
                    303: command.
                    304:
                    305: Once the software has been built, it is manipulated with the pkg_* tools so
                    306: that installation and de-installation, printing of an inventory of all
                    307: installed packages and retrieval of one-line comments or more verbose
                    308: descriptions are all simple.
                    309:
                    310: pkgsrc currently contains several thousand packages, including:
                    311:
                    312:   * www/apache - The Apache web server
1.20      ben       313:
1.1       grant     314:   * www/mozilla - The Mozilla web browser
1.20      ben       315:
1.1       grant     316:   * meta-pkgs/gnome - The GNOME Desktop Environment
1.20      ben       317:
1.1       grant     318:   * meta-pkgs/kde3 - The K Desktop Environment
1.20      ben       319:
1.1       grant     320: ...just to name a few.
                    321:
                    322: pkgsrc has built-in support for handling varying dependencies, such as pthreads
                    323: and X11, and extended features such as IPv6 support on a range of platforms.
                    324:
                    325: pkgsrc was derived from FreeBSD's ports system, and initially developed for
                    326: NetBSD only. Since then, pkgsrc has grown a lot, and now supports the following
                    327: platforms:
                    328:
                    329:   * Darwin (Mac OS X)
1.20      ben       330:
1.3       hubertf   331:   * DragonFlyBSD
1.20      ben       332:
1.1       grant     333:   * FreeBSD
1.20      ben       334:
1.3       hubertf   335:   * Microsoft Windows, via Interix
1.20      ben       336:
1.1       grant     337:   * IRIX
1.20      ben       338:
1.1       grant     339:   * Linux
1.20      ben       340:
1.1       grant     341:   * NetBSD (of course)
1.20      ben       342:
1.17      sketch    343:   * Tru64 (Digital UNIX, OSF1)
1.20      ben       344:
1.1       grant     345:   * OpenBSD
1.20      ben       346:
1.1       grant     347:   * Solaris
1.20      ben       348:
1.1       grant     349: 1.2. Overview
                    350:
1.2       hubertf   351: This document is divided into two parts. The first, The pkgsrc user's guide,
1.1       grant     352: describes how one can use one of the packages in the Package Collection, either
                    353: by installing a precompiled binary package, or by building one's own copy using
1.2       hubertf   354: the NetBSD package system. The second part, The pkgsrc developer's guide,
                    355: explains how to prepare a package so it can be easily built by other NetBSD
                    356: users without knowing about the package's building details.
1.1       grant     357:
                    358: This document is available in various formats:
                    359:
                    360:   * HTML
1.20      ben       361:
1.1       grant     362:   * PDF
1.20      ben       363:
1.1       grant     364:   * PS
1.20      ben       365:
1.1       grant     366:   * TXT
1.20      ben       367:
1.1       grant     368: 1.3. Terminology
                    369:
                    370: There has been a lot of talk about "ports", "packages", etc. so far. Here is a
                    371: description of all the terminology used within this document.
                    372:
                    373: Package
1.20      ben       374:
1.1       grant     375:     A set of files and building instructions that describe what's necessary to
                    376:     build a certain piece of software using pkgsrc. Packages are traditionally
                    377:     stored under /usr/pkgsrc.
1.20      ben       378:
1.1       grant     379: The NetBSD package system
1.20      ben       380:
1.1       grant     381:     This is the former name of "pkgsrc". It is part of the NetBSD operating
1.27      rillig    382:     system and can be bootstrapped to run on non-NetBSD operating systems as
                    383:     well. It handles building (compiling), installing, and removing of
                    384:     packages.
1.20      ben       385:
1.1       grant     386: Distfile
1.20      ben       387:
1.1       grant     388:     This term describes the file or files that are provided by the author of
                    389:     the piece of software to distribute his work. All the changes necessary to
                    390:     build on NetBSD are reflected in the corresponding package. Usually the
                    391:     distfile is in the form of a compressed tar-archive, but other types are
                    392:     possible, too. Distfiles are usually stored below /usr/pkgsrc/distfiles.
1.20      ben       393:
1.1       grant     394: Port
1.20      ben       395:
1.1       grant     396:     This is the term used by FreeBSD and OpenBSD people for what we call a
                    397:     package. In NetBSD terminology, "port" refers to a different architecture.
1.20      ben       398:
1.1       grant     399: Precompiled/binary package
1.20      ben       400:
1.1       grant     401:     A set of binaries built with pkgsrc from a distfile and stuffed together in
                    402:     a single .tgz file so it can be installed on machines of the same machine
                    403:     architecture without the need to recompile. Packages are usually generated
                    404:     in /usr/pkgsrc/packages; there is also an archive on ftp.NetBSD.org.
1.20      ben       405:
1.1       grant     406:     Sometimes, this is referred to by the term "package" too, especially in the
                    407:     context of precompiled packages.
1.20      ben       408:
1.1       grant     409: Program
1.20      ben       410:
1.1       grant     411:     The piece of software to be installed which will be constructed from all
1.47      reed      412:     the files in the distfile by the actions defined in the corresponding
1.1       grant     413:     package.
1.20      ben       414:
1.1       grant     415: 1.4. Typography
                    416:
                    417: When giving examples for commands, shell prompts are used to show if the
                    418: command should/can be issued as root, or if "normal" user privileges are
1.27      rillig    419: sufficient. We use a # for root's shell prompt, and a % for users' shell
1.1       grant     420: prompt, assuming they use the C-shell or tcsh.
                    421:
1.48      dillo     422: Part I. The pkgsrc user's guide
1.1       grant     423:
                    424: Table of Contents
                    425:
                    426: 2. Where to get pkgsrc
1.20      ben       427:
1.1       grant     428:     2.1. As tar file
                    429:     2.2. Via SUP
                    430:     2.3. Via CVS
1.20      ben       431:
1.1       grant     432: 3. Using pkgsrc on systems other than NetBSD
1.20      ben       433:
1.1       grant     434:     3.1. Bootstrapping pkgsrc
1.47      reed      435:     3.2. Platform-specific notes
1.20      ben       436:
1.1       grant     437:         3.2.1. Darwin (Mac OS X)
                    438:         3.2.2. FreeBSD
                    439:         3.2.3. Interix
                    440:         3.2.4. IRIX
1.22      tv        441:         3.2.5. Linux
                    442:         3.2.6. OpenBSD
                    443:         3.2.7. Solaris
1.20      ben       444:
1.1       grant     445: 4. Using pkgsrc
1.20      ben       446:
1.1       grant     447:     4.1. Working with binary packages
1.20      ben       448:
1.1       grant     449:         4.1.1. Where to get binary packages
                    450:         4.1.2. How to use binary packages
                    451:         4.1.3. A word of warning
1.20      ben       452:
1.1       grant     453:     4.2. Building packages from source
1.20      ben       454:
1.1       grant     455:         4.2.1. Requirements
                    456:         4.2.2. Fetching distfiles
                    457:         4.2.3. How to build and install
                    458:         4.2.4. Selecting the compiler
1.20      ben       459:
1.38      dillo     460: 5. Configuring pkgsrc
                    461:
1.45      wiz       462:     5.1. General configuration
                    463:     5.2. Variables affecting the build process
                    464:     5.3. Developer/advanced settings
                    465:     5.4. Selecting Build Options
1.20      ben       466:
1.38      dillo     467: 6. Creating binary packages
                    468:
                    469:     6.1. Building a single binary package
                    470:     6.2. Settings for creation of binary packages
                    471:     6.3. Doing a bulk build of all packages
                    472:
                    473:         6.3.1. Configuration
                    474:         6.3.2. Other environmental considerations
                    475:         6.3.3. Operation
                    476:         6.3.4. What it does
                    477:         6.3.5. Disk space requirements
1.47      reed      478:         6.3.6. Setting up a sandbox for chrooted builds
1.38      dillo     479:         6.3.7. Building a partial set of packages
                    480:         6.3.8. Uploading results of a bulk build
                    481:
                    482:     6.4. Creating a multiple CD-ROM packages collection
                    483:
                    484:         6.4.1. Example of cdpack
                    485:
                    486: 7. Frequently Asked Questions
                    487:
                    488:     7.1. Are there any mailing lists for pkg-related discussion?
                    489:     7.2. Where's the pkgviews documentation?
                    490:     7.3. Utilities for package management (pkgtools)
                    491:     7.4. How to use pkgsrc as non-root
                    492:     7.5. How to resume transfers when fetching distfiles?
                    493:     7.6. How can I install/use XFree86 from pkgsrc?
                    494:     7.7. How can I install/use X.org from pkgsrc?
                    495:     7.8. How to fetch files from behind a firewall
                    496:     7.9. How do I tell make fetch to do passive FTP?
                    497:     7.10. How to fetch all distfiles at once
                    498:     7.11. What does "Don't know how to make /usr/share/tmac/tmac.andoc" mean?
                    499:     7.12. What does "Could not find bsd.own.mk" mean?
                    500:     7.13. Using 'sudo' with pkgsrc
                    501:     7.14. How do I change the location of configuration files?
                    502:     7.15. Automated security checks
1.20      ben       503:
1.1       grant     504: Chapter 2. Where to get pkgsrc
                    505:
                    506: Table of Contents
                    507:
                    508: 2.1. As tar file
                    509: 2.2. Via SUP
                    510: 2.3. Via CVS
                    511:
                    512: There are three ways to get pkgsrc. Either as a tar file, via SUP, or via CVS.
                    513: All three ways are described here.
                    514:
                    515: 2.1. As tar file
                    516:
                    517: To get pkgsrc going, you need to get the pkgsrc.tar.gz file from ftp.NetBSD.org
                    518: and unpack it into /usr/pkgsrc.
                    519:
                    520: 2.2. Via SUP
                    521:
                    522: As an alternative to the tar file, you can get pkgsrc via the Software Update
                    523: Protocol, SUP. To do so, make sure your supfile has a line
                    524:
1.51    ! rillig    525:     release=pkgsrc
1.1       grant     526:
                    527: in it, see the examples in /usr/share/examples/supfiles, and that the /usr/
                    528: pkgsrc directory exists. Then, simply run sup -v /path/to/your/supfile.
                    529:
                    530: 2.3. Via CVS
                    531:
1.27      rillig    532: To get pkgsrc via CVS, make sure you have "cvs" installed. To do an initial
                    533: (full) checkout of pkgsrc, do the following steps:
1.1       grant     534:
                    535: % setenv CVSROOT anoncvs@anoncvs.NetBSD.org:/cvsroot
                    536: % setenv CVS_RSH ssh
                    537: % cd /usr
                    538: % cvs checkout -P pkgsrc
                    539:
                    540: This will create the pkgsrc directory in your /usr, and all the package source
                    541: will be stored under /usr/pkgsrc. To update pkgsrc after the initial checkout,
                    542: make sure you have CVS_RSH set as above, then do:
                    543:
                    544: % cd /usr/pkgsrc
                    545: % cvs -q update -dP
                    546:
                    547: Please also note that it is possible to have multiple copies of the pkgsrc
                    548: hierarchy in use at any one time - all work is done relatively within the
                    549: pkgsrc tree.
                    550:
                    551: Chapter 3. Using pkgsrc on systems other than NetBSD
                    552:
                    553: Table of Contents
                    554:
                    555: 3.1. Bootstrapping pkgsrc
1.47      reed      556: 3.2. Platform-specific notes
1.20      ben       557:
1.1       grant     558:     3.2.1. Darwin (Mac OS X)
                    559:     3.2.2. FreeBSD
                    560:     3.2.3. Interix
                    561:     3.2.4. IRIX
1.22      tv        562:     3.2.5. Linux
                    563:     3.2.6. OpenBSD
                    564:     3.2.7. Solaris
1.20      ben       565:
1.1       grant     566: 3.1. Bootstrapping pkgsrc
                    567:
1.27      rillig    568: For operating systems other than NetBSD, we provide a bootstrap kit to build
1.1       grant     569: the required tools to use pkgsrc on your platform. Besides support for native
                    570: NetBSD, pkgsrc and the bootstrap kit have support for the following operating
                    571: systems:
                    572:
                    573:   * Darwin (Mac OS X)
1.20      ben       574:
1.16      grant     575:   * DragonFlyBSD
1.20      ben       576:
1.1       grant     577:   * FreeBSD
1.20      ben       578:
1.1       grant     579:   * Interix (Windows 2000, XP, 2003)
1.20      ben       580:
1.1       grant     581:   * IRIX
1.20      ben       582:
1.1       grant     583:   * Linux
1.20      ben       584:
1.1       grant     585:   * OpenBSD
1.20      ben       586:
1.1       grant     587:   * Solaris
1.20      ben       588:
1.16      grant     589:   * Tru64 (Digital UNIX/OSF1)
1.20      ben       590:
1.1       grant     591: Support for other platforms is under development.
                    592:
                    593: Installing the bootstrap kit should be as simple as:
                    594:
                    595: # env CVS_RSH=ssh cvs -d anoncvs@anoncvs.NetBSD.org:/cvsroot checkout pkgsrc
                    596: # cd pkgsrc/bootstrap
                    597: # ./bootstrap
                    598:
                    599: See Chapter 2, Where to get pkgsrc for other ways to get pkgsrc before
                    600: bootstrapping. The given bootstrap command will use the defaults of /usr/pkg
                    601: for the prefix where programs will be installed in, and /var/db/pkg for the
1.27      rillig    602: package database directory where pkgsrc will do its internal bookkeeping.
                    603: However, these can also be set using command-line arguments.
1.1       grant     604:
                    605: Binary packages for the pkgsrc tools and an initial set of packages is
1.20      ben       606: available for supported platforms. An up-to-date list of these can be found on
1.1       grant     607: www.pkgsrc.org.
                    608:
1.47      reed      609: Note
                    610:
                    611: The bootstrap installs a bmake tool. Use this bmake when building via pkgsrc.
                    612: For examples in this guide, use bmake instead of "make".
                    613:
                    614: 3.2. Platform-specific notes
1.1       grant     615:
                    616: Here are some platform-specific notes you should be aware of.
                    617:
                    618: 3.2.1. Darwin (Mac OS X)
                    619:
                    620: Darwin 5.x and 6.x are supported. There are two methods of using pkgsrc on Mac
                    621: OS X, by using a disk image, or a UFS partition.
                    622:
                    623: Before you start, you will need to download and install the Mac OS X Developer
                    624: Tools from Apple's Developer Connection. See http://developer.apple.com/macosx/
1.20      ben       625: for details. Also, make sure you install X11 for Mac OS X and the X11 SDK from
1.1       grant     626: http://www.apple.com/macosx/x11/download/ if you intend to build packages that
                    627: use the X11 Window System.
                    628:
                    629: If you already have a UFS partition, or have a spare partition that you can
                    630: format as UFS, it is recommended to use that instead of the disk image. It'll
                    631: be somewhat faster and will mount automatically at boot time, where you must
                    632: manually mount a disk image.
                    633:
                    634: Note
                    635:
                    636: You cannot use a HFS+ file system for pkgsrc, because pkgsrc currently requires
1.47      reed      637: the file system to be case-sensitive, and HFS+ is not.
1.1       grant     638:
                    639: 3.2.1.1. Using a disk image
                    640:
                    641: Create the disk image:
                    642:
                    643: # cd pkgsrc/bootstrap
                    644: # ./ufsdiskimage create ~/Documents/NetBSD 512 # megabytes - season to taste
                    645: # ./ufsdiskimage mount ~/Documents/NetBSD
                    646: # sudo chown `id -u`:`id -g` /Volumes/NetBSD
                    647:
                    648: That's it!
                    649:
                    650: 3.2.1.2. Using a UFS partition
                    651:
                    652: By default, /usr will be on your root file system, normally HFS+. It is
                    653: possible to use the default prefix of /usr/pkg by symlinking /usr/pkg to a
                    654: directory on a UFS file system. Obviously, another symlink is required if you
                    655: want to place the package database directory outside the prefix. e.g.
                    656:
1.22      tv        657: # ./bootstrap --pkgdbdir /usr/pkg/pkgdb --pkgsrcdir /Volumes/ufs/pkgsrc
1.1       grant     658:
                    659: If you created your partitions at the time of installing Mac OS X and formatted
                    660: the target partition as UFS, it should automatically mount on /Volumes/<volume
                    661: name> when the machine boots. If you are (re)formatting a partition as UFS, you
                    662: need to ensure that the partition map correctly reflects "Apple_UFS" and not
                    663: "Apple_HFS".
                    664:
                    665: The problem is that none of the disk tools will let you touch a disk that is
                    666: booted from. You can unmount the partition, but even if you newfs it, the
                    667: partition type will be incorrect and the automounter won't mount it. It can be
                    668: mounted manually, but it won't appear in Finder.
                    669:
                    670: You'll need to boot off of the OS X Installation (User) CD. When the
                    671: Installation program starts, go up to the menu and select Disk Utility. Now,
                    672: you will be able to select the partition you want to be UFS, and Format it
                    673: Apple UFS. Quit the Disk Utility, quit the installer which will reboot your
                    674: machine. The new UFS file system will appear in Finder.
                    675:
                    676: Be aware that the permissions on the new file system will be writable by root
                    677: only.
                    678:
                    679: This note is as of 10.2 (Jaguar) and applies to earlier versions. Hopefully
                    680: Apple will fix Disk Utility in 10.3 (Panther).
                    681:
                    682: 3.2.2. FreeBSD
                    683:
                    684: FreeBSD 4.7 and 5.0 have been tested and are supported, other versions may
                    685: work.
                    686:
                    687: Care should be taken so that the tools that this kit installs do not conflict
                    688: with the FreeBSD userland tools. There are several steps:
                    689:
                    690:  1. FreeBSD stores its ports pkg database in /var/db/pkg. It is therefore
                    691:     recommended that you choose a different location (e.g. /usr/pkgdb) by using
                    692:     the --pkgdbdir option to the bootstrap script.
1.20      ben       693:
1.1       grant     694:  2. If you do not intend to use the FreeBSD ports tools, it's probably a good
                    695:     idea to move them out of the way to avoid confusion, e.g.
1.20      ben       696:
1.1       grant     697:     # cd /usr/sbin
                    698:     # mv pkg_add pkg_add.orig
                    699:     # mv pkg_create pkg_create.orig
                    700:     # mv pkg_delete pkg_delete.orig
                    701:     # mv pkg_info pkg_info.orig
1.20      ben       702:
1.1       grant     703:  3. An example /etc/mk.conf file will be placed in /etc/mk.conf.example file
                    704:     when you use the bootstrap script.
1.20      ben       705:
1.1       grant     706: 3.2.3. Interix
                    707:
1.47      reed      708: Interix is a POSIX-compatible subsystem for the Windows NT kernel, providing a
1.1       grant     709: Unix-like environment with a tighter kernel integration than available with
                    710: Cygwin. It is part of the Windows Services for Unix package, available for free
1.22      tv        711: for any licensed copy of Windows 2000, XP (not including XP Home), or 2003. SFU
                    712: can be downloaded from http://www.microsoft.com/windows/sfu/.
1.1       grant     713:
                    714: Services for Unix 3.5, current as of this writing, has been tested. 3.0 or 3.1
                    715: may work, but are not officially supported. (The main difference in 3.0/3.1 is
                    716: lack of pthreads.)
                    717:
1.2       hubertf   718: 3.2.3.1. When installing Interix/SFU
1.1       grant     719:
                    720: At an absolute minimum, the following packages must be installed from the
                    721: Windows Services for Unix 3.5 distribution in order to use pkgsrc:
                    722:
                    723:   * Utilities -> Base Utilities
1.20      ben       724:
1.1       grant     725:   * Interix GNU Components -> (all)
1.20      ben       726:
1.1       grant     727:   * Remote Connectivity
1.20      ben       728:
1.1       grant     729:   * Interix SDK
1.20      ben       730:
1.1       grant     731: When using pkgsrc on Interix, DO NOT install the Utilities subcomponent "UNIX
                    732: Perl". That is Perl 5.6 without shared module support, installed to /usr/local,
                    733: and will only cause confusion. Instead, install Perl 5.8 from pkgsrc (or from a
                    734: binary package).
                    735:
                    736: The Remote Connectivity subcomponent "Windows Remote Shell Service" does not
                    737: need to be installed, but Remote Connectivity itself should be installed in
                    738: order to have a working inetd.
                    739:
                    740: Finally, during installation you may be asked whether to enable setuid behavior
                    741: for Interix programs, and whether to make pathnames default to case-sensitive.
                    742: Setuid should be enabled, and case-sensitivity MUST be enabled. (Without
                    743: case-sensitivity, a large number of packages including perl will not build.)
                    744:
                    745: 3.2.3.2. What to do if Interix/SFU is already installed
                    746:
                    747: If SFU is already installed and you wish to alter these settings to work with
                    748: pkgsrc, note the following things.
                    749:
                    750:   * To uninstall UNIX Perl, use Add/Remove Programs, select Microsoft Windows
                    751:     Services for UNIX, then click Change. In the installer, choose Add or
                    752:     Remove, then uncheck Utilities->UNIX Perl.
1.20      ben       753:
1.47      reed      754:   * To enable case-sensitivity for the file system, run REGEDIT.EXE, and change
1.1       grant     755:     the following registry key:
1.20      ben       756:
1.1       grant     757:     HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Control\Session Manager\kernel
1.20      ben       758:
1.1       grant     759:     Set the DWORD value "obcaseinsensitive" to 0; then reboot.
1.20      ben       760:
1.1       grant     761:   * To enable setuid binaries (optional), run REGEDIT.EXE, and change the
                    762:     following registry key:
1.20      ben       763:
1.1       grant     764:     HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Services for UNIX
1.20      ben       765:
1.1       grant     766:     Set the DWORD value "EnableSetuidBinaries" to 1; then reboot.
1.20      ben       767:
1.1       grant     768: 3.2.3.3. Important notes for using pkgsrc
                    769:
                    770: The package imanager (either the pkgsrc "su" user, or the user running
                    771: "pkg_add") must be a member of the local Administrators group. Such a user must
                    772: also be used to run the bootstrap. This is slightly relaxed from the normal
                    773: pkgsrc requirement of "root".
                    774:
                    775: The package manager should use a umask of 002. "make install" will
                    776: automatically complain if this is not the case. This ensures that directories
                    777: written in /var/db/pkg are Administrators-group writeable.
                    778:
                    779: The popular Interix binary packages from http://www.interopsystems.com/ use an
                    780: older version of pkgsrc's pkg_* tools. Ideally, these should NOT be used in
                    781: conjunction with pkgsrc. If you choose to use them at the same time as the
                    782: pkgsrc packages, ensure that you use the proper pkg_* tools for each type of
                    783: binary package.
                    784:
1.22      tv        785: The TERM setting used for DOS-type console windows (including those invoked by
                    786: the csh and ksh startup shortcuts) is "interix". Most systems don't have a
                    787: termcap/terminfo entry for it, but the following .termcap entry provides
                    788: adequate emulation in most cases:
                    789:
1.51    ! rillig    790:     interix:kP=\E[S:kN=\E[T:kH=\E[U:dc@:DC@:tc=pcansi:
1.22      tv        791:
1.1       grant     792: 3.2.4. IRIX
                    793:
                    794: You will need a working C compiler, either gcc or SGI's MIPS and MIPSpro
                    795: compiler (cc/c89). Please set the CC environment variable according to your
                    796: preference. If you do not have a license for the MIPSpro compiler suite, you
                    797: can download a gcc tardist file from http://freeware.sgi.com/.
                    798:
                    799: Please note that you will need IRIX 6.5.17 or higher, as this is the earliest
                    800: version of IRIX providing support for if_indextoname(3), if_nametoindex(3),
                    801: etc.
                    802:
1.27      rillig    803: At this point in time, pkgsrc only supports one ABI at a time. That is, you can
                    804: not switch between the old 32-bit ABI, the new 32-bit ABI and the 64-bit ABI.
                    805: If you start out using "abi=n32", that's what all your packages will be built
1.1       grant     806: with.
                    807:
                    808: Therefore, please make sure that you have no conflicting CFLAGS in your
                    809: environment or the /etc/mk.conf. Particularly, make sure that you do not try to
                    810: link n32 object files with lib64 or vice versa. Check your /etc/
                    811: compiler.defaults!
                    812:
                    813: If you have the actual pkgsrc tree mounted via NFS from a different host,
                    814: please make sure to set WRKOBJDIR to a local directory, as it appears that IRIX
1.47      reed      815: linker occasionally runs into issues when trying to link over a network-mounted
                    816: file system.
1.1       grant     817:
                    818: The bootstrapping process should set all the right options for programs such as
                    819: imake(1), but you may want to set some options depending on your local setup.
1.27      rillig    820: Please see pkgsrc/mk/defaults/mk.conf and, of course, your compiler's man pages
1.11      ben       821: for details.
1.1       grant     822:
1.22      tv        823: If you are using SGI's MIPSPro compiler, please set
                    824:
1.51    ! rillig    825:     PKGSRC_COMPILER=        mipspro
1.22      tv        826:
                    827: in /etc/mk.conf. Otherwise, pkgsrc will assume you are using gcc and may end up
                    828: passing invalid flags to the compiler. Note that bootstrap should create an
                    829: appropriate mk.conf.example by default.
                    830:
                    831: If you have both the MIPSPro compiler chain installed as well as gcc, but want
                    832: to make sure that MIPRPro is used, please set your PATH to not include the
                    833: location of gcc (often /usr/freeware/bin), and (important) pass the
                    834: '--preserve-path' flag.
                    835:
                    836: 3.2.5. Linux
                    837:
                    838: Some versions of Linux (for example Debian GNU/Linux) need either libtermcap or
                    839: libcurses (libncurses). Installing the distributions libncurses-dev package (or
                    840: equivalent) should fix the problem.
                    841:
                    842: pkgsrc supports both gcc (GNU Compiler Collection) and icc (Intel C++
                    843: Compiler). gcc is the default. icc 8.0 and 8.1 on i386 have been tested.
                    844:
                    845: To bootstrap using icc, assuming the default icc installation directory:
                    846:
1.51    ! rillig    847:     env CC=/opt/intel_cc_80/bin/icc LDFLAGS=-static-libcxa \
        !           848:             ac_cv___attribute__=yes ./bootstrap
1.22      tv        849:
                    850: Note
                    851:
                    852: icc 8.1 needs the `-i-static' argument instead of -static-libcxa.
                    853:
                    854: icc supports __attribute__, but the GNU configure test uses a nested function,
                    855: which icc does not support. #undef'ing __attribute__ has the unfortunate
                    856: side-effect of breaking many of the Linux header files, which cannot be
                    857: compiled properly without __attribute__. The test must be overridden so that
                    858: __attribute__ is assumed supported by the compiler.
                    859:
                    860: After bootstrapping, you should set PKGSRC_COMPILER in /etc/mk.conf:
                    861:
1.51    ! rillig    862:     PKGSRC_COMPILER=        icc
1.22      tv        863:
                    864: The default installation directory for icc is /opt/intel_cc_80, which is also
                    865: the pkgsrc default. If you have installed it into a different directory, set
                    866: ICCBASE in /etc/mk.conf:
                    867:
1.51    ! rillig    868:     ICCBASE=                /opt/icc
1.22      tv        869:
                    870: pkgsrc uses the static linking method of the runtime libraries provided by icc,
                    871: so binaries can be run on other systems which do not have the shared libraries
                    872: installed.
                    873:
                    874: Libtool, however, extracts a list of libraries from the ld(1) command run when
                    875: linking a C++ shared library and records it, throwing away the -Bstatic and
                    876: -Bdynamic options interspersed between the libraries. This means that
                    877: libtool-linked C++ shared libraries will have a runtime dependency on the icc
                    878: libraries until this is fixed in libtool.
                    879:
                    880: 3.2.6. OpenBSD
1.1       grant     881:
                    882: OpenBSD 3.0 and 3.2 are tested and supported.
                    883:
                    884: Care should be taken so that the tools that this kit installs do not conflict
                    885: with the OpenBSD userland tools. There are several steps:
                    886:
                    887:  1. OpenBSD stores its ports pkg database in /var/db/pkg. It is therefore
                    888:     recommended that you choose a different location (e.g. /usr/pkgdb) by using
                    889:     the --pkgdbdir option to the bootstrap script.
1.20      ben       890:
1.1       grant     891:  2. If you do not intend to use the OpenBSD ports tools, it's probably a good
                    892:     idea to move them out of the way to avoid confusion, e.g.
1.20      ben       893:
1.1       grant     894:     # cd /usr/sbin
                    895:     # mv pkg_add pkg_add.orig
                    896:     # mv pkg_create pkg_create.orig
                    897:     # mv pkg_delete pkg_delete.orig
                    898:     # mv pkg_info pkg_info.orig
1.20      ben       899:
1.1       grant     900:  3. An example /etc/mk.conf file will be placed in /etc/mk.conf.example file
                    901:     when you use the bootstrap script. OpenBSD's make program uses /etc/mk.conf
1.47      reed      902:     as well. You can work around this by enclosing all the pkgsrc-specific
1.1       grant     903:     parts of the file with:
1.20      ben       904:
1.51    ! rillig    905:         .ifdef BSD_PKG_MK
        !           906:         # pkgsrc stuff, e.g. insert defaults/mk.conf or similar here
        !           907:         .else
        !           908:         # OpenBSD stuff
        !           909:         .endif
1.20      ben       910:
1.1       grant     911:
1.22      tv        912: 3.2.7. Solaris
1.1       grant     913:
                    914: Solaris 2.6 through 9 are supported on both x86 and sparc. You will need a
                    915: working C compiler. Both gcc 2.95.3 and Sun WorkShop 5 have been tested.
                    916:
                    917: The following packages are required on Solaris 8 for the bootstrap process and
                    918: to build packages.
                    919:
                    920:   * SUNWsprot
1.20      ben       921:
1.1       grant     922:   * SUNWarc
1.20      ben       923:
1.1       grant     924:   * SUNWbtool
1.20      ben       925:
1.1       grant     926:   * SUNWtoo
1.20      ben       927:
1.1       grant     928:   * SUNWlibm
1.20      ben       929:
1.1       grant     930: Please note the use of GNU binutils on Solaris is not supported.
                    931:
1.22      tv        932: 3.2.7.1. If you are using gcc
1.1       grant     933:
                    934: It makes life much simpler if you only use the same gcc consistently for
                    935: building all packages.
                    936:
                    937: It is recommended that an external gcc be used only for bootstrapping, then
                    938: either build gcc from lang/gcc or install a binary gcc package, then remove gcc
                    939: used during bootstrapping.
                    940:
                    941: Binary packages of gcc can be found through http://www.sun.com/bigadmin/common/
                    942: freewareSearch.html.
                    943:
1.22      tv        944: 3.2.7.2. If you are using Sun WorkShop
1.1       grant     945:
                    946: You will need at least the following packages installed (from WorkShop 5.0)
                    947:
                    948:   * SPROcc - Sun WorkShop Compiler C 5.0
1.20      ben       949:
1.1       grant     950:   * SPROcpl - Sun WorkShop Compiler C++ 5.0
1.20      ben       951:
1.1       grant     952:   * SPROild - Sun WorkShop Incremental Linker
1.20      ben       953:
1.1       grant     954:   * SPROlang - Sun WorkShop Compilers common components
1.20      ben       955:
1.47      reed      956: You should set CC, CXX and optionally, CPP in /etc/mk.conf, e.g.:
1.1       grant     957:
1.51    ! rillig    958:     CC=     cc
        !           959:     CXX=    CC
        !           960:     CPP=    /usr/ccs/lib/cpp
1.1       grant     961:
1.47      reed      962: You may also want to build 64-bit binaries, e.g.:
1.1       grant     963:
1.51    ! rillig    964:     CFLAGS= -xtarget=ultra -xarch=v9
1.1       grant     965:
                    966: Whichever compiler you use, please ensure the compiler tools and your $prefix
1.47      reed      967: are in your PATH. This includes /usr/ccs/{bin,lib} and e.g. /usr/pkg/
                    968: {bin,sbin}.
1.1       grant     969:
                    970: Chapter 4. Using pkgsrc
                    971:
                    972: Table of Contents
                    973:
                    974: 4.1. Working with binary packages
1.20      ben       975:
1.1       grant     976:     4.1.1. Where to get binary packages
                    977:     4.1.2. How to use binary packages
                    978:     4.1.3. A word of warning
1.20      ben       979:
1.1       grant     980: 4.2. Building packages from source
1.20      ben       981:
1.1       grant     982:     4.2.1. Requirements
                    983:     4.2.2. Fetching distfiles
                    984:     4.2.3. How to build and install
                    985:     4.2.4. Selecting the compiler
1.20      ben       986:
1.1       grant     987: 4.1. Working with binary packages
                    988:
                    989: This section describes how to find, retrieve and install a precompiled binary
                    990: package that someone else already prepared for your type of machine.
                    991:
                    992: 4.1.1. Where to get binary packages
                    993:
                    994: Precompiled packages are stored on ftp.NetBSD.org and its mirrors in the
1.27      rillig    995: directory /pub/NetBSD/packages/<OSVERSION>/<ARCH>/ for anonymous FTP access.
                    996: OSVERSION is the NetBSD version (uname -r), ARCH is the architecture (uname -p
                    997: ). In that directory, there is a subdirectory for each category plus a
                    998: subdirectory All which includes the actual binaries in .tgz files. The category
                    999: subdirectories use symbolic links to those files (this is the same directory
                   1000: layout as in /usr/pkgsrc/packages).
1.1       grant    1001:
1.47      reed     1002: This same directory layout applies for CD-ROM distributions, only that the
1.1       grant    1003: directory may be rooted somewhere else, probably somewhere below /cdrom. Please
1.47      reed     1004: consult your CD-ROMs documentation for the exact location.
1.1       grant    1005:
                   1006: 4.1.2. How to use binary packages
                   1007:
1.47      reed     1008: If you have the files on a CD-ROM or downloaded them to your hard disk, you can
1.27      rillig   1009: install them with the following command (be sure to su to root first):
1.1       grant    1010:
                   1011: # pkg_add /path/to/package.tgz
                   1012:
                   1013: If you have FTP access and you don't want to download the packages via FTP
                   1014: prior to installation, you can do this automatically by giving pkg_add an FTP
                   1015: URL:
                   1016:
1.27      rillig   1017: # pkg_add ftp://ftp.NetBSD.org/pub/NetBSD/packages/<OSVERSION>/<ARCH>/All/package.tgz
1.1       grant    1018:
1.27      rillig   1019: Note that any prerequisite packages needed to run the package in question will
                   1020: be installed, too, assuming they are present where you install from.
1.1       grant    1021:
1.23      wiz      1022: To save some typing, you can set the PKG_PATH environment variable to a
1.47      reed     1023: semicolon-separated list of paths (including remote URLs); trailing slashes are
1.23      wiz      1024: not allowed.
                   1025:
                   1026: Additionally to the All directory there exists a vulnerable directory to which
                   1027: binary packages with known vulnerabilities are moved, since removing them could
                   1028: cause missing dependencies. To use these packages, add the vulnerable directory
                   1029: to your PKG_PATH. However, you should run security/audit-packages regularly,
1.47      reed     1030: especially after installing new packages, and verify that the vulnerabilities
                   1031: are acceptable for your configuration. An example PKG_PATH would be: ftp://
                   1032: ftp.NetBSD.org/pub/NetBSD/packages/<OSVERSION>/<ARCH>/All;ftp://ftp.NetBSD.org/
                   1033: pub/NetBSD/packages/<OSVERSION>/<ARCH>/vulnerable Please note that semicolon
                   1034: (';') is a shell meta-character, so you'll probably have to quote it.
1.23      wiz      1035:
1.27      rillig   1036: After you've installed packages, be sure to have /usr/pkg/bin and /usr/pkg/sbin
                   1037: in your PATH so you can actually start the just installed program.
1.1       grant    1038:
                   1039: 4.1.3. A word of warning
                   1040:
                   1041: Please pay very careful attention to the warnings expressed in the pkg_add(1)
                   1042: manual page about the inherent dangers of installing binary packages which you
                   1043: did not create yourself, and the security holes that can be introduced onto
                   1044: your system by indiscriminate adding of such files.
                   1045:
                   1046: 4.2. Building packages from source
                   1047:
1.46      gdt      1048: This assumes that the package is already in pkgsrc. If it is not, see Part II,
1.27      rillig   1049: "The pkgsrc developer's guide" for instructions how to create your own
                   1050: packages.
1.1       grant    1051:
                   1052: 4.2.1. Requirements
                   1053:
                   1054: To build packages from source on a NetBSD system the "comp" and the "text"
1.47      reed     1055: distribution sets must be installed. If you want to build X11-related packages
1.1       grant    1056: the "xbase" and "xcomp" distribution sets are required, too.
                   1057:
                   1058: 4.2.2. Fetching distfiles
                   1059:
1.27      rillig   1060: The first step for building a package is downloading the distfiles (i.e. the
                   1061: unmodified source). If they have not yet been downloaded, pkgsrc will fetch
                   1062: them automatically.
1.1       grant    1063:
                   1064: You can overwrite some of the major distribution sites to fit to sites that are
1.11      ben      1065: close to your own. Have a look at pkgsrc/mk/defaults/mk.conf to find some
1.27      rillig   1066: examples ? in particular, look for the MASTER_SORT, MASTER_SORT_REGEX and
1.1       grant    1067: INET_COUNTRY definitions. This may save some of your bandwidth and time.
                   1068:
                   1069: You can change these settings either in your shell's environment, or, if you
                   1070: want to keep the settings, by editing the /etc/mk.conf file, and adding the
                   1071: definitions there.
                   1072:
                   1073: If you don't have a permanent Internet connection and you want to know which
                   1074: files to download, make fetch-list will tell you what you'll need. Put these
                   1075: distfiles into /usr/pkgsrc/distfiles.
                   1076:
                   1077: 4.2.3. How to build and install
                   1078:
                   1079: Assuming that the distfile has been fetched (see previous section), become root
1.47      reed     1080: and change into the relevant directory and run make.
                   1081:
                   1082: Note
                   1083:
                   1084: If using bootstrap or pkgsrc on a non-NetBSD system, use the pkgsrc bmake
                   1085: command instead of "make" in the examples in this guide.
                   1086:
                   1087: For example, type
1.1       grant    1088:
                   1089: % cd misc/figlet
                   1090: % make
                   1091:
                   1092: at the shell prompt to build the various components of the package, and
                   1093:
                   1094: # make install
                   1095:
                   1096: to install the various components into the correct places on your system.
                   1097: Installing the package on your system requires you to be root. However, pkgsrc
                   1098: has a just-in-time-su feature, which allows you to only become root for the
                   1099: actual installation step
                   1100:
                   1101: Taking the figlet utility as an example, we can install it on our system by
1.46      gdt      1102: building as shown in Appendix B, Build logs.
1.1       grant    1103:
                   1104: The program is installed under the default root of the packages tree - /usr/
                   1105: pkg. Should this not conform to your tastes, set the LOCALBASE variable in your
                   1106: environment, and it will use that value as the root of your packages tree. So,
                   1107: to use /usr/local, set LOCALBASE=/usr/local in your environment. Please note
                   1108: that you should use a directory which is dedicated to packages and not shared
1.47      reed     1109: with other programs (i.e., do not try and use LOCALBASE=/usr). Also, you should
1.1       grant    1110: not try to add any of your own files or directories (such as src/, obj/, or
                   1111: pkgsrc/) below the LOCALBASE tree. This is to prevent possible conflicts
                   1112: between programs and other files installed by the package system and whatever
                   1113: else may have been installed there.
                   1114:
                   1115: Some packages look in /etc/mk.conf to alter some configuration options at build
1.11      ben      1116: time. Have a look at pkgsrc/mk/defaults/mk.conf to get an overview of what will
                   1117: be set there by default. Environment variables such as LOCALBASE can be set in
                   1118: /etc/mk.conf to save having to remember to set them each time you want to use
                   1119: pkgsrc.
1.1       grant    1120:
                   1121: Occasionally, people want to "look under the covers" to see what is going on
                   1122: when a package is building or being installed. This may be for debugging
                   1123: purposes, or out of simple curiosity. A number of utility values have been
                   1124: added to help with this.
                   1125:
                   1126:  1. If you invoke the make(1) command with PKG_DEBUG_LEVEL=2, then a huge
                   1127:     amount of information will be displayed. For example,
1.20      ben      1128:
1.1       grant    1129:     make patch PKG_DEBUG_LEVEL=2
1.20      ben      1130:
1.1       grant    1131:     will show all the commands that are invoked, up to and including the
                   1132:     "patch" stage.
1.20      ben      1133:
1.1       grant    1134:  2. If you want to know the value of a certain make(1) definition, then the
                   1135:     VARNAME definition should be used, in conjunction with the show-var target.
1.22      tv       1136:     e.g. to show the expansion of the make(1) variable LOCALBASE:
1.20      ben      1137:
1.1       grant    1138:     % make show-var VARNAME=LOCALBASE
                   1139:     /usr/pkg
                   1140:     %
1.20      ben      1141:
                   1142:
1.1       grant    1143:
                   1144: If you want to install a binary package that you've either created yourself
                   1145: (see next section), that you put into pkgsrc/packages manually or that is
1.8       wiz      1146: located on a remote FTP server, you can use the "bin-install" target. This
1.1       grant    1147: target will install a binary package - if available - via pkg_add(1), else do a
                   1148: make package. The list of remote FTP sites searched is kept in the variable
1.11      ben      1149: BINPKG_SITES, which defaults to ftp.NetBSD.org. Any flags that should be added
                   1150: to pkg_add(1) can be put into BIN_INSTALL_FLAGS. See pkgsrc/mk/defaults/mk.conf
                   1151: for more details.
1.1       grant    1152:
1.47      reed     1153: A final word of warning: If you set up a system that has a non-standard setting
1.1       grant    1154: for LOCALBASE, be sure to set that before any packages are installed, as you
                   1155: can not use several directories for the same purpose. Doing so will result in
                   1156: pkgsrc not being able to properly detect your installed packages, and fail
                   1157: miserably. Note also that precompiled binary packages are usually built with
                   1158: the default LOCALBASE of /usr/pkg, and that you should not install any if you
                   1159: use a non-standard LOCALBASE.
                   1160:
                   1161: 4.2.4. Selecting the compiler
                   1162:
                   1163: By default, pkgsrc will use GCC to build packages. This may be overridden by
                   1164: setting the following variables in /etc/mk.conf:
                   1165:
                   1166: PKGSRC_COMPILER:
1.20      ben      1167:
1.1       grant    1168:     This is a list of values specifying the chain of compilers to invoke when
                   1169:     building packages. Valid values are:
1.20      ben      1170:
1.1       grant    1171:       * distcc: distributed C/C++ (chainable)
1.20      ben      1172:
1.1       grant    1173:       * ccache: compiler cache (chainable)
1.20      ben      1174:
1.1       grant    1175:       * gcc: GNU C/C++ Compiler
1.20      ben      1176:
1.1       grant    1177:       * mipspro: Silicon Graphics, Inc. MIPSpro (n32/n64)
1.20      ben      1178:
1.1       grant    1179:       * mipspro: Silicon Graphics, Inc. MIPSpro (o32)
1.20      ben      1180:
1.1       grant    1181:       * sunpro: Microsystems, Inc. WorkShip/Forte/Sun ONE Studio
1.20      ben      1182:
1.1       grant    1183:     The default is "gcc". You can use ccache and/or distcc with an appropriate
                   1184:     PKGSRC_COMPILER setting, e.g. "ccache gcc". This variable should always be
                   1185:     terminated with a value for a real compiler.
1.20      ben      1186:
1.1       grant    1187: GCC_REQD:
1.20      ben      1188:
1.1       grant    1189:     This specifies the minimum version of GCC to use when building packages. If
                   1190:     the system GCC doesn't satisfy this requirement, then pkgsrc will build and
                   1191:     install one of the GCC packages to use instead.
1.20      ben      1192:
1.38      dillo    1193: Chapter 5. Configuring pkgsrc
                   1194:
                   1195: Table of Contents
                   1196:
1.45      wiz      1197: 5.1. General configuration
                   1198: 5.2. Variables affecting the build process
                   1199: 5.3. Developer/advanced settings
                   1200: 5.4. Selecting Build Options
1.38      dillo    1201:
1.45      wiz      1202: 5.1. General configuration
                   1203:
1.47      reed     1204: In this section, you can find some variables that apply to all pkgsrc packages.
                   1205: The preferred method of setting these variables is by setting them in /etc/
                   1206: mk.conf.
1.45      wiz      1207:
                   1208:   * LOCALBASE: Where packages will be installed. The default is /usr/pkg. Do
                   1209:     not mix binary packages with different LOCALBASEs!
                   1210:
                   1211:   * CROSSBASE: Where "cross" category packages will be installed. The default
                   1212:     is ${LOCALBASE}/cross.
                   1213:
                   1214:   * X11BASE: Where X11 is installed on the system. The default is /usr/X11R6.
                   1215:
                   1216:   * DISTDIR: Where to store the downloaded copies of the original source
                   1217:     distributions used for building pkgsrc packages. The default is $
                   1218:     {PKGSRCDIR}/distfiles.
                   1219:
                   1220:   * MASTER_SITE_OVERRIDE: If set, override the packages' MASTER_SITES with this
                   1221:     value.
                   1222:
                   1223:   * MASTER_SITE_BACKUP: Backup location(s) for distribution files and patch
                   1224:     files if not found locally or in ${MASTER_SITES} or ${PATCH_SITES}
                   1225:     respectively. The defaults are ftp://ftp.NetBSD.org/pub/NetBSD/packages/
                   1226:     distfiles/${DIST_SUBDIR}/ and ftp://ftp.freebsd.org/pub/FreeBSD/distfiles/$
                   1227:     {DIST_SUBDIR}/.
                   1228:
                   1229:   * BINPKG_SITES: List of sites carrying binary pkgs.
                   1230:
                   1231: 5.2. Variables affecting the build process
                   1232:
                   1233: XXX
                   1234:
                   1235:   * PACKAGES: The top level directory for the binary packages. The default is $
                   1236:     {PKGSRCDIR}/packages.
                   1237:
                   1238:   * WRKOBJDIR: The top level directory where, if defined, the separate working
                   1239:     directories will get created, and symbolically linked to from ${WRKDIR}
                   1240:     (see below). This is useful for building packages on several architectures,
                   1241:     then ${PKGSRCDIR} can be NFS-mounted while ${WRKOBJDIR} is local to every
                   1242:     architecture. (It should be noted that PKGSRCDIR should not be set by the
                   1243:     user ? it is an internal definition which refers to the root of the pkgsrc
                   1244:     tree. It is possible to have many pkgsrc tree instances.)
                   1245:
                   1246:   * LOCALPATCHES: Directory for local patches that aren't part of pkgsrc. See
                   1247:     Section 8.3, "patches/*" for more information. rel and arch are replaced
                   1248:     with OS release ("2.0", etc.) and architecture ("mipsel", etc.).
                   1249:
                   1250:   * PKGMAKECONF: Location of the mk.conf file used by a package's BSD-style
                   1251:     Makefile. If this is not set, MAKECONF is set to /dev/null to avoid picking
                   1252:     up settings used by builds in /usr/src.
                   1253:
                   1254: 5.3. Developer/advanced settings
                   1255:
                   1256: XXX
                   1257:
                   1258:   * PKG_DEVELOPER: Run some sanity checks that package developers want:
                   1259:
                   1260:       o make sure patches apply with zero fuzz
                   1261:
                   1262:       o run check-shlibs to see that all binaries will find their shared libs.
                   1263:
                   1264:   * PKG_DEBUG_LEVEL: The level of debugging output which is displayed whilst
                   1265:     making and installing the package. The default value for this is 0, which
                   1266:     will not display the commands as they are executed (normal, default, quiet
                   1267:     operation); the value 1 will display all shell commands before their
                   1268:     invocation, and the value 2 will display both the shell commands before
                   1269:     their invocation, and their actual execution progress with set -x will be
                   1270:     displayed.
                   1271:
                   1272: 5.4. Selecting Build Options
1.38      dillo    1273:
                   1274: Some packages have build time options, usually to select between different
                   1275: dependencies, enable optional support for big dependencies or enable
                   1276: experimental features.
                   1277:
                   1278: To see which options, if any, a package supports, and which options are
                   1279: mutually exclusive, run make show-options, for example:
                   1280:
1.51    ! rillig   1281:     The following options are supported by this package:
        !          1282:     ssl      Enable SSL support.
        !          1283:     Exactly one of the following gecko options is required:
        !          1284:     firefox  Use firefox as gecko rendering engine.
        !          1285:     mozilla  Use mozilla as gecko rendering engine.
        !          1286:     At most one of the following database options may be selected:
        !          1287:     mysql    Enable support for MySQL database.
        !          1288:     pgsql    Enable support for PostgreSQL database.
1.38      dillo    1289:
1.51    ! rillig   1290:     These options are enabled by default: firefox
        !          1291:     These options are currently enabled: mozilla ssl
1.38      dillo    1292:
                   1293: The following variables can be defined in /etc/mk.conf to select which options
                   1294: to enable for a package: PKG_DEFAULT_OPTIONS, which can be used to select or
                   1295: disable options for all packages that support them, and PKG_OPTIONS.pkgbase,
                   1296: which can be used to select or disable options specifically for package pkgbase
                   1297: . Options listed in these variables are selected, options preceded by "-" are
                   1298: disabled.
                   1299:
1.39      dillo    1300: The following settings are consulted in the order given, and the last setting
                   1301: that selects or disables an option is used:
1.38      dillo    1302:
                   1303:  1. the default options as suggested by the package maintainer
                   1304:
                   1305:  2. the options implied by the settings of legacy variables (see below)
                   1306:
                   1307:  3. PKG_DEFAULT_OPTIONS
                   1308:
                   1309:  4. PKG_OPTIONS.pkgbase
                   1310:
                   1311: For groups of mutually exclusive options, the last option selected is used, all
                   1312: others are automatically disabled. If an option of the group is explicitly
                   1313: disabled, the previously selected option, if any, is used. It is an error if no
                   1314: option from a required group of options is selected, and building the package
                   1315: will fail.
                   1316:
                   1317: Before the options framework was introduced, build options were selected by
                   1318: setting a variable in /etc/mk.conf for each option. To ease transition to the
                   1319: options framework for the user, these legacy variables are converted to the
                   1320: appropriate options setting automatically. A warning is issued to prompt the
                   1321: user to update /etc/mk.conf to use the options framework directly. Support for
                   1322: these legacy variables will be removed eventually.
                   1323:
                   1324: Chapter 6. Creating binary packages
1.1       grant    1325:
                   1326: Table of Contents
                   1327:
1.38      dillo    1328: 6.1. Building a single binary package
                   1329: 6.2. Settings for creation of binary packages
                   1330: 6.3. Doing a bulk build of all packages
                   1331:
                   1332:     6.3.1. Configuration
                   1333:     6.3.2. Other environmental considerations
                   1334:     6.3.3. Operation
                   1335:     6.3.4. What it does
                   1336:     6.3.5. Disk space requirements
1.47      reed     1337:     6.3.6. Setting up a sandbox for chrooted builds
1.38      dillo    1338:     6.3.7. Building a partial set of packages
                   1339:     6.3.8. Uploading results of a bulk build
1.20      ben      1340:
1.38      dillo    1341: 6.4. Creating a multiple CD-ROM packages collection
1.20      ben      1342:
1.38      dillo    1343:     6.4.1. Example of cdpack
1.20      ben      1344:
1.38      dillo    1345: 6.1. Building a single binary package
1.1       grant    1346:
                   1347: Once you have built and installed a package, you can create a binary package
1.47      reed     1348: which can be installed on another system with pkg_add(1). This saves having to
1.1       grant    1349: build the same package on a group of hosts and wasting CPU time. It also
                   1350: provides a simple means for others to install your package, should you
                   1351: distribute it.
                   1352:
                   1353: To create a binary package, change into the appropriate directory in pkgsrc,
                   1354: and run make package:
                   1355:
                   1356: # cd misc/figlet
                   1357: # make package
                   1358:
                   1359: This will build and install your package (if not already done), and then build
                   1360: a binary package from what was installed. You can then use the pkg_* tools to
                   1361: manipulate it. Binary packages are created by default in /usr/pkgsrc/packages,
1.46      gdt      1362: in the form of a gzipped tar file. See Section B.2, "Packaging figlet" for a
1.1       grant    1363: continuation of the above misc/figlet example.
                   1364:
1.38      dillo    1365: See Chapter 17, Submitting and Committing for information on how to submit such
1.1       grant    1366: a binary package.
                   1367:
1.38      dillo    1368: 6.2. Settings for creation of binary packages
1.1       grant    1369:
1.38      dillo    1370: See Section 14.3, "Other helpful targets".
1.1       grant    1371:
1.38      dillo    1372: 6.3. Doing a bulk build of all packages
1.1       grant    1373:
                   1374: If you want to get a full set of precompiled binary packages, this section
                   1375: describes how to get them. Beware that the bulk build will remove all currently
1.23      wiz      1376: installed packages from your system! Having an FTP server configured either on
1.1       grant    1377: the machine doing the bulk builds or on a nearby NFS server can help to make
                   1378: the packages available to everyone. See ftpd(8) for more information. If you
                   1379: use a remote NFS server's storage, be sure to not actually compile on NFS
                   1380: storage, as this slows things down a lot.
                   1381:
1.38      dillo    1382: 6.3.1. Configuration
1.1       grant    1383:
1.38      dillo    1384: 6.3.1.1. /etc/mk.conf
1.1       grant    1385:
1.23      wiz      1386: You may want to set variables in /etc/mk.conf. Look at pkgsrc/mk/defaults/
                   1387: mk.conf for details of the default settings. You will want to ensure that
1.11      ben      1388: ACCEPTABLE_LICENSES meet your local policy. As used in this example,
                   1389: _ACCEPTABLE=yes accepts all licenses.
1.1       grant    1390:
1.51    ! rillig   1391:     PACKAGES?=      ${_PKGSRCDIR}/packages/${MACHINE_ARCH}
        !          1392:     WRKOBJDIR?=     /usr/tmp/pkgsrc   # build here instead of in pkgsrc
        !          1393:     BSDSRCDIR=      /usr/src
        !          1394:     BSDXSRCDIR=     /usr/xsrc         # for x11/xservers
        !          1395:     OBJHOSTNAME?=   yes               # use work.`hostname`
        !          1396:     FAILOVER_FETCH= yes               # insist on the correct checksum
        !          1397:     PKG_DEVELOPER?= yes
        !          1398:     _ACCEPTABLE=    yes
1.1       grant    1399:
1.38      dillo    1400: 6.3.1.2. build.conf
1.1       grant    1401:
                   1402: In pkgsrc/mk/bulk, copy build.conf-example to build.conf and edit it, following
                   1403: the comments in that file. This is the config file that determines where log
                   1404: files are generated after the build, where to mail the build report to, where
1.23      wiz      1405: your pkgsrc tree is located and the user to which user to su(8) to do a cvs
                   1406: update.
1.1       grant    1407:
1.45      wiz      1408: 6.3.1.3. pre-build.local
1.1       grant    1409:
1.47      reed     1410: It is possible to configure the bulk build to perform certain site-specific
1.1       grant    1411: tasks at the end of the pre-build stage. If the file pre-build.local exists in
1.23      wiz      1412: /usr/pkgsrc/mk/bulk, it will be executed (as a sh(1) script) at the end of the
1.1       grant    1413: usual pre-build stage. An example use of pre-build.local is to have the line:
                   1414:
                   1415: # echo "I do not have enough disk space to build this pig." \
1.23      wiz      1416:     > pkgsrc/misc/openoffice/$BROKENF
1.1       grant    1417:
                   1418: to prevent the system from trying to build a particular package which requires
                   1419: nearly 3 GB of disk space.
                   1420:
1.38      dillo    1421: 6.3.2. Other environmental considerations
1.1       grant    1422:
                   1423: As /usr/pkg will be completely deleted at the start of bulk builds, make sure
                   1424: your login shell is placed somewhere else. Either drop it into /usr/local/bin
1.20      ben      1425: (and adjust your login shell in the passwd file), or (re-)install it via
1.1       grant    1426: pkg_add(1) from /etc/rc.local, so you can login after a reboot (remember that
                   1427: your current process won't die if the package is removed, you just can't start
                   1428: any new instances of the shell any more). Also, if you use NetBSD earlier than
                   1429: 1.5, or you still want to use the pkgsrc version of ssh for some reason, be
                   1430: sure to install ssh before starting it from rc.local:
                   1431:
1.51    ! rillig   1432:     ( cd /usr/pkgsrc/security/ssh ; make bulk-install )
        !          1433:     if [ -f /usr/pkg/etc/rc.d/sshd ]; then
        !          1434:         /usr/pkg/etc/rc.d/sshd
        !          1435:     fi
1.1       grant    1436:
                   1437: Not doing so will result in you being not able to log in via ssh after the bulk
                   1438: build is finished or if the machine gets rebooted or crashes. You have been
                   1439: warned! :)
                   1440:
1.38      dillo    1441: 6.3.3. Operation
1.1       grant    1442:
                   1443: Make sure you don't need any of the packages still installed.
                   1444:
                   1445: Warning
                   1446:
                   1447: During the bulk build, all packages will be removed!
                   1448:
                   1449: Be sure to remove all other things that might interfere with builds, like some
                   1450: libs installed in /usr/local, etc. then become root and type:
                   1451:
                   1452: # cd /usr/pkgsrc
                   1453: # sh mk/bulk/build
                   1454:
                   1455: If for some reason your last build didn't complete (power failure, system
                   1456: panic, ...), you can continue it by running:
                   1457:
                   1458: # sh mk/bulk/build restart
                   1459:
                   1460: At the end of the bulk build, you will get a summary via mail, and find build
                   1461: logs in the directory specified by FTP in the build.conf file.
                   1462:
1.38      dillo    1463: 6.3.4. What it does
1.1       grant    1464:
                   1465: The bulk builds consist of three steps:
                   1466:
                   1467: 1. pre-build
1.20      ben      1468:
1.1       grant    1469:     The script updates your pkgsrc tree via (anon)cvs, then cleans out any
                   1470:     broken distfiles, and removes all packages installed.
1.20      ben      1471:
1.1       grant    1472: 2. the bulk build
1.20      ben      1473:
1.1       grant    1474:     This is basically "make bulk-package" with an optimised order in which
                   1475:     packages will be built. Packages that don't require other packages will be
                   1476:     built first, and packages with many dependencies will be built later.
1.20      ben      1477:
1.1       grant    1478: 3. post-build
1.20      ben      1479:
1.1       grant    1480:     Generates a report that's placed in the directory specified in the
                   1481:     build.conf file named broken.html, a short version of that report will also
                   1482:     be mailed to the build's admin.
1.20      ben      1483:
1.1       grant    1484: During the build, a list of broken packages will be compiled in /usr/pkgsrc
                   1485: /.broken (or .../.broken.${MACHINE} if OBJMACHINE is set), individual build
                   1486: logs of broken builds can be found in the package's directory. These files are
                   1487: used by the bulk-targets to mark broken builds to not waste time trying to
                   1488: rebuild them, and they can be used to debug these broken package builds later.
                   1489:
1.38      dillo    1490: 6.3.5. Disk space requirements
1.1       grant    1491:
                   1492: Currently, roughly the following requirements are valid for NetBSD 2.0/i386:
                   1493:
                   1494:   * 10 GB - distfiles (NFS ok)
1.20      ben      1495:
1.1       grant    1496:   * 8 GB - full set of all binaries (NFS ok)
1.20      ben      1497:
1.1       grant    1498:   * 5 GB - temp space for compiling (local disk recommended)
1.20      ben      1499:
1.1       grant    1500: Note that all pkgs will be de-installed as soon as they are turned into a
                   1501: binary package, and that sources are removed, so there is no excessively huge
                   1502: demand to disk space. Afterwards, if the package is needed again, it will be
                   1503: installed via pkg_add(1) instead of building again, so there are no cycles
                   1504: wasted by recompiling.
                   1505:
1.47      reed     1506: 6.3.6. Setting up a sandbox for chrooted builds
1.1       grant    1507:
1.12      agc      1508: If you don't want all the packages nuked from a machine (rendering it useless
1.23      wiz      1509: for anything but pkg compiling), there is the possibility of doing the package
                   1510: bulk build inside a chroot environment.
1.1       grant    1511:
1.12      agc      1512: The first step is to set up a chroot sandbox, e.g. /usr/sandbox. This can be
                   1513: done by using null mounts, or manually.
                   1514:
                   1515: There is a shell script called pkgsrc/mk/bulk/mksandbox which will set up the
                   1516: sandbox environment using null mounts. It will also create a script called
                   1517: sandbox in the root of the sandbox environment, which will allow the null
                   1518: mounts to be activated using the sandbox mount command and deactivated using
                   1519: the sandbox umount command.
                   1520:
                   1521: To set up a sandbox environment by hand, after extracting all the sets from a
                   1522: NetBSD installation or doing a make distribution DESTDIR=/usr/sandbox in /usr/
                   1523: src/etc, be sure the following items are present and properly configured:
1.1       grant    1524:
                   1525:  1. Kernel
1.20      ben      1526:
1.1       grant    1527:     # cp /netbsd /usr/sandbox
1.20      ben      1528:
1.1       grant    1529:  2. /dev/*
1.20      ben      1530:
1.1       grant    1531:     # cd /usr/sandbox/dev ; sh MAKEDEV all
1.20      ben      1532:
1.1       grant    1533:  3. /etc/resolv.conf (for security/smtpd and mail):
1.20      ben      1534:
1.1       grant    1535:     # cp /etc/resolv.conf /usr/sandbox/etc
1.20      ben      1536:
1.1       grant    1537:  4. Working(!) mail config (hostname, sendmail.cf):
1.20      ben      1538:
1.1       grant    1539:     # cp /etc/mail/sendmail.cf /usr/sandbox/etc/mail
1.20      ben      1540:
1.1       grant    1541:  5. /etc/localtime (for security/smtpd):
1.20      ben      1542:
1.1       grant    1543:     # ln -sf /usr/share/zoneinfo/UTC /usr/sandbox/etc/localtime
1.20      ben      1544:
1.1       grant    1545:  6. /usr/src (system sources, for sysutils/aperture, net/ppp-mppe):
1.20      ben      1546:
1.1       grant    1547:     # ln -s ../disk1/cvs .
1.23      wiz      1548:     # ln -s cvs/src-2.0 src
1.20      ben      1549:
1.1       grant    1550:  7. Create /var/db/pkg (not part of default install):
1.20      ben      1551:
1.1       grant    1552:     # mkdir /usr/sandbox/var/db/pkg
1.20      ben      1553:
1.1       grant    1554:  8. Create /usr/pkg (not part of default install):
1.20      ben      1555:
1.1       grant    1556:     # mkdir /usr/sandbox/usr/pkg
1.20      ben      1557:
1.1       grant    1558:  9. Checkout pkgsrc via cvs into /usr/sandbox/usr/pkgsrc:
1.20      ben      1559:
1.1       grant    1560:     # cd /usr/sandbox/usr
                   1561:     # cvs -d anoncvs@anoncvs.NetBSD.org:/cvsroot checkout -d -P pkgsrc
1.20      ben      1562:
1.1       grant    1563:     Do not mount/link this to the copy of your pkgsrc tree you do development
                   1564:     in, as this will likely cause problems!
1.20      ben      1565:
1.1       grant    1566: 10. Make /usr/sandbox/usr/pkgsrc/packages and .../distfiles point somewhere
                   1567:     appropriate. NFS- and/or nullfs-mounts may come in handy!
1.20      ben      1568:
1.38      dillo    1569: 11. Edit /etc/mk.conf, see Section 6.3.1.1, "/etc/mk.conf".
1.20      ben      1570:
1.1       grant    1571: 12. Adjust mk/bulk/build.conf to suit your needs.
1.20      ben      1572:
1.1       grant    1573: 13. If you have set CVS_USER in build.conf, make sure that account exists and
                   1574:     can do a cvs ${CVS_FLAGS} update properly!
1.20      ben      1575:
1.47      reed     1576: When the chroot sandbox is set up, you can start the build with the following
1.1       grant    1577: steps:
                   1578:
                   1579: # cd /usr/sandbox/usr/pkgsrc
                   1580: # sh mk/bulk/do-sandbox-build
                   1581:
                   1582: This will just jump inside the sandbox and start building. At the end of the
                   1583: build, mail will be sent with the results of the build. Created binary pkgs
                   1584: will be in /usr/sandbox/usr/pkgsrc/packages (wherever that points/mounts to/
                   1585: from).
                   1586:
1.38      dillo    1587: 6.3.7. Building a partial set of packages
1.1       grant    1588:
                   1589: In addition to building a complete set of all packages in pkgsrc, the pkgsrc/mk
                   1590: /bulk/build script may be used to build a subset of the packages contained in
1.47      reed     1591: pkgsrc. By setting SPECIFIC_PKGS in /etc/mk.conf, the variables
1.1       grant    1592:
                   1593:   * SITE_SPECIFIC_PKGS
1.20      ben      1594:
1.1       grant    1595:   * HOST_SPECIFIC_PKGS
1.20      ben      1596:
1.1       grant    1597:   * GROUP_SPECIFIC_PKGS
1.20      ben      1598:
1.1       grant    1599:   * USER_SPECIFIC_PKGS
1.20      ben      1600:
1.1       grant    1601: will define the set of packages which should be built. The bulk build code will
                   1602: also include any packages which are needed as dependencies for the explicitly
                   1603: listed packages.
                   1604:
                   1605: One use of this is to do a bulk build with SPECIFIC_PKGS in a chroot sandbox
                   1606: periodically to have a complete set of the binary packages needed for your site
                   1607: available without the overhead of building extra packages that are not needed.
                   1608:
1.38      dillo    1609: 6.3.8. Uploading results of a bulk build
1.13      hubertf  1610:
                   1611: This section describes how pkgsrc developers can upload binary pkgs built by
                   1612: bulk builds to ftp.NetBSD.org.
                   1613:
1.17      sketch   1614: If you would like to automatically create checksum files for the binary
                   1615: packages you intend to upload, remember to set MKSUMS=yes in your mk/bulk/
                   1616: build.conf.
                   1617:
                   1618: If you would like to PGP sign the checksum files (highly recommended!),
                   1619: remember to set SIGN_AS=username@NetBSD.org in your mk/bulk/build.conf. This
1.23      wiz      1620: will prompt you for your GPG password to sign the files before uploading
1.17      sketch   1621: everything.
                   1622:
                   1623: Then, make sure that you have RSYNC_DST set properly in your mk/bulk/build.conf
                   1624: file, i.e. adjust it to something like one of the following:
1.13      hubertf  1625:
1.20      ben      1626: RSYNC_DST=$CVS_USER@ftp.NetBSD.org:/pub/NetBSD/packages/pkgsrc-200xQy/NetBSD-a.b.c/arch/upload
1.13      hubertf  1627:
1.47      reed     1628: Please use appropriate values for "pkgsrc-200xQy", "NetBSD-a.b.c" and "arch"
1.13      hubertf  1629: here. If your login on ftp.NetBSD.org is different from CVS_USER, write your
                   1630: login directly into the variable, e.g. my local account is "feyrer", but for my
                   1631: login "hubertf", I use:
                   1632:
1.20      ben      1633: RSYNC_DST=hubertf@ftp.NetBSD.org:/pub/NetBSD/packages/pkgsrc-200xQy/NetBSD-a.b.c/arch/upload
1.13      hubertf  1634:
                   1635: A separate upload directory is used here to allow "closing" the directory
                   1636: during upload. To do so, run the following command on ftp.NetBSD.org next:
                   1637:
                   1638: nbftp% mkdir -p -m 750 /pub/NetBSD/packages/pkgsrc-200xQy/NetBSD-a.b.c/arch/upload
                   1639:
                   1640: Please note that /pub/NetBSD/packages is only appropriate for packages for the
                   1641: NetBSD operating system. Binary packages for other operating systems should go
                   1642: into /pub/pkgsrc.
                   1643:
1.23      wiz      1644: Before uploading the binary pkgs, ssh authentication needs to be set up. This
1.47      reed     1645: example shows how to set up temporary keys for the root account inside the
1.13      hubertf  1646: sandbox (assuming that no keys should be present there usually):
                   1647:
1.20      ben      1648: # chroot /usr/sandbox
                   1649: chroot-# rm $HOME/.ssh/id-dsa*
                   1650: chroot-# ssh-keygen -t dsa
                   1651: chroot-# cat $HOME/.ssh/id-dsa.pub
1.13      hubertf  1652:
                   1653: Now take the output of id-dsa.pub and append it to your ~/.ssh/authorized_keys
1.17      sketch   1654: file on ftp.NetBSD.org. You can remove the key after the upload is done!
1.13      hubertf  1655:
                   1656: Next, test if your ssh connection really works:
                   1657:
1.20      ben      1658: chroot-# ssh ftp.NetBSD.org date
1.13      hubertf  1659:
                   1660: Use "-l yourNetBSDlogin" here as appropriate!
                   1661:
                   1662: Now after all this works, you can exit the sandbox and start the upload:
                   1663:
1.20      ben      1664: chroot-# exit
                   1665: # cd /usr/sandbox/usr/pkgsrc
                   1666: # sh mk/bulk/do-sandbox-upload
1.13      hubertf  1667:
1.24      wiz      1668: The upload process may take quite some time. Use ls(1) or du(1) on the FTP
                   1669: server to monitor progress of the upload. The upload script will take care of
                   1670: not uploading restricted packages and putting vulnerable packages into the
                   1671: vulnerable subdirectory.
1.13      hubertf  1672:
                   1673: After the upload has ended, first thing is to revoke ssh access:
                   1674:
                   1675: nbftp% vi ~/.ssh/authorized_keys
1.20      ben      1676: Gdd:x!
1.13      hubertf  1677:
                   1678: Use whatever is needed to remove the key you've entered before! Last, move the
                   1679: uploaded packages out of the upload directory to have them accessible to
                   1680: everyone:
                   1681:
                   1682: nbftp% cd /pub/NetBSD/packages/pkgsrc-200xQy/NetBSD-a.b.c/arch
                   1683: nbftp% mv upload/* .
                   1684: nbftp% rmdir upload
1.20      ben      1685: nbftp% chmod 755 .
1.13      hubertf  1686:
1.38      dillo    1687: 6.4. Creating a multiple CD-ROM packages collection
1.1       grant    1688:
                   1689: After your pkgsrc bulk-build has completed, you may wish to create a CD-ROM set
                   1690: of the resulting binary packages to assist in installing packages on other
                   1691: machines. The pkgtools/cdpack package provides a simple tool for creating the
                   1692: ISO 9660 images. cdpack arranges the packages on the CD-ROMs in a way that
1.47      reed     1693: keeps all the dependencies for a given package on the same CD as that package.
1.1       grant    1694:
1.38      dillo    1695: 6.4.1. Example of cdpack
1.1       grant    1696:
1.47      reed     1697: Complete documentation for cdpack is found in the cdpack(1) man page. The
1.1       grant    1698: following short example assumes that the binary packages are left in /usr/
                   1699: pkgsrc/packages/All and that sufficient disk space exists in /u2 to hold the
                   1700: ISO 9660 images.
                   1701:
                   1702: # mkdir /u2/images
                   1703: # pkg_add /usr/pkgsrc/packages/All/cdpack
                   1704: # cdpack /usr/pkgsrc/packages/All /u2/images
                   1705:
                   1706: If you wish to include a common set of files (COPYRIGHT, README, etc.) on each
                   1707: CD in the collection, then you need to create a directory which contains these
                   1708: files. e.g.
                   1709:
                   1710: # mkdir /tmp/common
                   1711: # echo "This is a README" > /tmp/common/README
                   1712: # echo "Another file" > /tmp/common/COPYING
                   1713: # mkdir /tmp/common/bin
                   1714: # echo "#!/bin/sh" > /tmp/common/bin/myscript
                   1715: # echo "echo Hello world" >> /tmp/common/bin/myscript
                   1716: # chmod 755 /tmp/common/bin/myscript
                   1717:
                   1718: Now create the images:
                   1719:
                   1720: # cdpack -x /tmp/common /usr/pkgsrc/packages/All /u2/images
                   1721:
                   1722: Each image will contain README, COPYING, and bin/myscript in their root
                   1723: directories.
                   1724:
1.38      dillo    1725: Chapter 7. Frequently Asked Questions
1.1       grant    1726:
                   1727: Table of Contents
                   1728:
1.38      dillo    1729: 7.1. Are there any mailing lists for pkg-related discussion?
                   1730: 7.2. Where's the pkgviews documentation?
                   1731: 7.3. Utilities for package management (pkgtools)
                   1732: 7.4. How to use pkgsrc as non-root
                   1733: 7.5. How to resume transfers when fetching distfiles?
                   1734: 7.6. How can I install/use XFree86 from pkgsrc?
                   1735: 7.7. How can I install/use X.org from pkgsrc?
                   1736: 7.8. How to fetch files from behind a firewall
                   1737: 7.9. How do I tell make fetch to do passive FTP?
                   1738: 7.10. How to fetch all distfiles at once
                   1739: 7.11. What does "Don't know how to make /usr/share/tmac/tmac.andoc" mean?
                   1740: 7.12. What does "Could not find bsd.own.mk" mean?
                   1741: 7.13. Using 'sudo' with pkgsrc
                   1742: 7.14. How do I change the location of configuration files?
                   1743: 7.15. Automated security checks
1.1       grant    1744:
                   1745: This section contains hints, tips & tricks on special things in pkgsrc that we
                   1746: didn't find a better place for in the previous chapters, and it contains items
                   1747: for both pkgsrc users and developers.
                   1748:
1.38      dillo    1749: 7.1. Are there any mailing lists for pkg-related discussion?
1.1       grant    1750:
1.18      xtraeme  1751: The following mailing lists may be of interest to pkgsrc users:
1.1       grant    1752:
1.34      wiz      1753:   * pkgsrc-bugs: A list where problem reports related to pkgsrc are sent and
                   1754:     discussed.
1.20      ben      1755:
1.34      wiz      1756:   * pkgsrc-bulk: A list where the results of pkgsrc bulk builds are sent and
                   1757:     discussed.
1.20      ben      1758:
1.34      wiz      1759:   * pkgsrc-changes: A list where all commit messages to pkgsrc are sent.
1.20      ben      1760:
1.34      wiz      1761:   * tech-pkg: A general discussion list for all things related to pkgsrc.
1.20      ben      1762:
1.18      xtraeme  1763: To subscribe, do:
                   1764:
1.51    ! rillig   1765:     % echo subscribe listname | mail majordomo@NetBSD.org
1.18      xtraeme  1766:
                   1767: Archives for all these mailing lists are available from http://
                   1768: mail-index.NetBSD.org/.
1.1       grant    1769:
1.38      dillo    1770: 7.2. Where's the pkgviews documentation?
1.1       grant    1771:
                   1772: Pkgviews is tightly integrated with buildlink. You can find a pkgviews User's
                   1773: guide in pkgsrc/mk/buildlink3/PKGVIEWS_UG.
                   1774:
1.38      dillo    1775: 7.3. Utilities for package management (pkgtools)
1.1       grant    1776:
                   1777: The pkgsrc/pkgtools directory pkgtools contains a number of useful utilities
                   1778: for both users and developers of pkgsrc. This section attempts only to make the
                   1779: reader aware of the utilities and when they might be useful, and not to
                   1780: duplicate the documentation that comes with each package.
                   1781:
                   1782: Utilities used by pkgsrc (automatically installed when needed):
                   1783:
1.34      wiz      1784:   * pkgtools/x11-links: Symlinks for use by buildlink.
1.20      ben      1785:
1.1       grant    1786: OS tool augmentation (automatically installed when needed):
                   1787:
1.34      wiz      1788:   * pkgtools/digest: Calculates various kinds of checksums (including SHA1).
1.20      ben      1789:
1.34      wiz      1790:   * pkgtools/libnbcompat: Compatibility library for pkgsrc tools.
1.20      ben      1791:
1.34      wiz      1792:   * pkgtools/mtree: Installed on non-BSD systems due to lack of native mtree.
1.20      ben      1793:
1.34      wiz      1794:   * pkgtools/pkg_install: Up-to-date replacement for /usr/sbin/pkg_install, or
                   1795:     for use on operating systems where pkg_install is not present.
1.20      ben      1796:
1.1       grant    1797: Utilities used by pkgsrc (not automatically installed):
                   1798:
1.34      wiz      1799:   * pkgtools/pkg_tarup: Create a binary package from an already-installed
                   1800:     package. Used by make replace to save the old package.
1.20      ben      1801:
1.34      wiz      1802:   * pkgtools/dfdisk: Adds extra functionality to pkgsrc, allowing it to fetch
1.5       hubertf  1803:     distfiles from multiple locations. It currently supports the following
                   1804:     methods: multiple CD-ROMs and network FTP/HTTP connections.
1.20      ben      1805:
1.34      wiz      1806:   * pkgtools/xpkgwedge: Put X11 packages someplace else (enabled by default).
1.20      ben      1807:
1.34      wiz      1808:   * devel/cpuflags: Determine the best compiler flags to optimise code for your
                   1809:     current CPU and compiler.
1.20      ben      1810:
1.1       grant    1811: Utilities for keeping track of installed packages, being up to date, etc:
                   1812:
1.34      wiz      1813:   * pkgtools/pkg_chk: Reports on packages whose installed versions do not match
                   1814:     the latest pkgsrc entries.
1.20      ben      1815:
1.34      wiz      1816:   * pkgtools/pkgdep: Makes dependency graphs of packages, to aid in choosing a
                   1817:     strategy for updating.
1.20      ben      1818:
1.34      wiz      1819:   * pkgtools/pkgdepgraph: Makes graphs from the output of pkgtools/pkgdep (uses
                   1820:     graphviz).
1.20      ben      1821:
1.34      wiz      1822:   * pkgtools/pkglint: The pkglint(1) program checks a pkgsrc entry for errors,
1.27      rillig   1823:     lintpkgsrc(1) does various checks on the complete pkgsrc system.
1.20      ben      1824:
1.34      wiz      1825:   * pkgtools/pkgsurvey: Report what packages you have installed.
1.20      ben      1826:
1.1       grant    1827: Utilities for people maintaining or creating individual packages:
                   1828:
1.34      wiz      1829:   * pkgtools/pkgdiff: Automate making and maintaining patches for a package
                   1830:     (includes pkgdiff, pkgvi, mkpatches, etc.).
1.20      ben      1831:
1.34      wiz      1832:   * pkgtools/rpm2pkg, pkgtools/url2pkg: Aids in converting to pkgsrc.
1.20      ben      1833:
1.34      wiz      1834:   * pkgtools/gensolpkg: Convert pkgsrc to a Solaris package.
1.20      ben      1835:
1.47      reed     1836: Utilities for people maintaining pkgsrc (or: more obscure pkg utilities)
1.20      ben      1837:
1.34      wiz      1838:   * pkgtools/pkg_comp: Build packages in a chrooted area.
1.20      ben      1839:
1.34      wiz      1840:   * pkgtools/libkver: Spoof kernel version for chrooted cross builds.
1.20      ben      1841:
1.38      dillo    1842: 7.4. How to use pkgsrc as non-root
1.1       grant    1843:
                   1844: If you want to use pkgsrc as non-root user, you can set some variables to make
1.33      jmmv     1845: pkgsrc work under these conditions. At the very least, you need to set
                   1846: UNPRIVILEGED to "yes"; this will turn on unprivileged mode and set multiple
                   1847: related variables to allow installation of packages as non-root.
                   1848:
                   1849: In case the defaults are not enough, you may want to tune some other variables
                   1850: used. For example, if the automatic user/group detection leads to incorrect
                   1851: values (or not the ones you would like to use), you can change them by setting
                   1852: UNPRIVILEGED_USER and UNPRIVILEGED_GROUP respectively.
                   1853:
                   1854: As regards bootstrapping, please note that the bootstrap script will ease
                   1855: non-root configuration when given the "--ignore-user-check" flag, as it will
                   1856: choose and use multiple default directories under ~/pkg as the installation
                   1857: targets. These directories can be overriden by the "--prefix" flag provided by
                   1858: the script, as well as some others that allow finer tuning of the tree layout.
1.1       grant    1859:
1.38      dillo    1860: 7.5. How to resume transfers when fetching distfiles?
1.14      xtraeme  1861:
1.47      reed     1862: By default, resuming transfers in pkgsrc is disabled, but you can enable this
1.15      xtraeme  1863: feature by adding the option PKG_RESUME_TRANSFERS=YES into /etc/mk.conf. If,
                   1864: during a fetch step, an incomplete distfile is found, pkgsrc will try to resume
                   1865: it.
                   1866:
                   1867: You can also use a different program than the default ftp(1) by changing the
                   1868: FETCH_CMD variable. Don't forget to set FETCH_RESUME_ARGS and FETCH_OUTPUT_ARGS
                   1869: if you are not using default values.
1.14      xtraeme  1870:
                   1871: For example, if you want to use wget to resume downloads, you'll have to use
                   1872: something like:
                   1873:
1.51    ! rillig   1874:     FETCH_CMD=             wget
        !          1875:     FETCH_BEFORE_ARGS=     --passive-ftp
        !          1876:     FETCH_RESUME_ARGS=     -c
        !          1877:     FETCH_OUTPUT_ARGS=     -O
1.14      xtraeme  1878:
1.38      dillo    1879: 7.6. How can I install/use XFree86 from pkgsrc?
1.1       grant    1880:
                   1881: If you want to use XFree86 from pkgsrc instead of your system's own X11 (/usr/
1.15      xtraeme  1882: X11R6, /usr/openwin, ...), you will have to add the following line into /etc/
1.1       grant    1883: mk.conf:
                   1884:
1.51    ! rillig   1885:     X11_TYPE=XFree86
1.14      xtraeme  1886:
1.38      dillo    1887: 7.7. How can I install/use X.org from pkgsrc?
1.1       grant    1888:
                   1889: If you want to use X.org from pkgsrc instead of your system's own X11 (/usr/
1.15      xtraeme  1890: X11R6, /usr/openwin, ...) you will have to add the following line into /etc/
                   1891: mk.conf:
1.1       grant    1892:
1.51    ! rillig   1893:     X11_TYPE=xorg
1.14      xtraeme  1894:
1.38      dillo    1895: 7.8. How to fetch files from behind a firewall
1.1       grant    1896:
                   1897: If you are sitting behind a firewall which does not allow direct connections to
                   1898: Internet hosts (i.e. non-NAT), you may specify the relevant proxy hosts. This
1.47      reed     1899: is done using an environment variable in the form of a URL, e.g. in Amdahl, the
1.1       grant    1900: machine "orpheus.amdahl.com" is one of the firewalls, and it uses port 80 as
                   1901: the proxy port number. So the proxy environment variables are:
                   1902:
1.51    ! rillig   1903:     ftp_proxy=ftp://orpheus.amdahl.com:80/
        !          1904:     http_proxy=http://orpheus.amdahl.com:80/
1.1       grant    1905:
1.38      dillo    1906: 7.9. How do I tell make fetch to do passive FTP?
1.1       grant    1907:
                   1908: This depends on which utility is used to retrieve distfiles. From bsd.pkg.mk,
                   1909: FETCH_CMD is assigned the first available command from the following list:
                   1910:
1.34      wiz      1911:   * ${LOCALBASE}/bin/ftp
                   1912:
                   1913:   * /usr/bin/ftp
1.1       grant    1914:
                   1915: On a default NetBSD installation, this will be /usr/bin/ftp, which
                   1916: automatically tries passive connections first, and falls back to active
                   1917: connections if the server refuses to do passive. For the other tools, add the
                   1918: following to your /etc/mk.conf file: PASSIVE_FETCH=1.
                   1919:
                   1920: Having that option present will prevent /usr/bin/ftp from falling back to
                   1921: active transfers.
                   1922:
1.38      dillo    1923: 7.10. How to fetch all distfiles at once
1.1       grant    1924:
                   1925: You would like to download all the distfiles in a single batch from work or
                   1926: university, where you can't run a make fetch. There is an archive of distfiles
                   1927: on ftp.NetBSD.org, but downloading the entire directory may not be appropriate.
                   1928:
1.47      reed     1929: The answer here is to do a make fetch-list in /usr/pkgsrc or one of its
1.1       grant    1930: subdirectories, carry the resulting list to your machine at work/school and use
1.23      wiz      1931: it there. If you don't have a NetBSD-compatible ftp(1) (like lukemftp) at work,
1.1       grant    1932: don't forget to set FETCH_CMD to something that fetches a URL:
                   1933:
                   1934: At home:
                   1935:
                   1936: % cd /usr/pkgsrc
                   1937: % make fetch-list FETCH_CMD=wget DISTDIR=/tmp/distfiles >/tmp/fetch.sh
                   1938: % scp /tmp/fetch.sh work:/tmp
                   1939:
                   1940: At work:
                   1941:
                   1942: % sh /tmp/fetch.sh
                   1943:
                   1944: then tar up /tmp/distfiles and take it home.
                   1945:
                   1946: If you have a machine running NetBSD, and you want to get all distfiles (even
                   1947: ones that aren't for your machine architecture), you can do so by using the
                   1948: above-mentioned make fetch-list approach, or fetch the distfiles directly by
                   1949: running:
                   1950:
                   1951: % make mirror-distfiles
                   1952:
                   1953: If you even decide to ignore NO_{SRC,BIN}_ON_{FTP,CDROM}, then you can get
                   1954: everything by running:
                   1955:
                   1956: % make fetch NO_SKIP=yes
                   1957:
1.38      dillo    1958: 7.11. What does "Don't know how to make /usr/share/tmac/tmac.andoc" mean?
1.1       grant    1959:
                   1960: When compiling the pkgtools/pkg_install package, you get the error from make
                   1961: that it doesn't know how to make /usr/share/tmac/tmac.andoc? This indicates
1.23      wiz      1962: that you don't have installed the "text" set (nroff, ...) from the NetBSD base
1.47      reed     1963: distribution on your machine. It is recommended to do that to format man pages.
1.1       grant    1964:
                   1965: In the case of the pkgtools/pkg_install package, you can get away with setting
                   1966: NOMAN=YES either in the environment or in /etc/mk.conf.
                   1967:
1.38      dillo    1968: 7.12. What does "Could not find bsd.own.mk" mean?
1.1       grant    1969:
                   1970: You didn't install the compiler set, comp.tgz, when you installed your NetBSD
1.47      reed     1971: machine. Please get and install it, by extracting it in /:
1.1       grant    1972:
                   1973: # cd /
                   1974: # tar --unlink -zxvpf .../comp.tgz
                   1975:
                   1976: comp.tgz is part of every NetBSD release. Get the one that corresponds to your
                   1977: release (determine via uname -r).
                   1978:
1.38      dillo    1979: 7.13. Using 'sudo' with pkgsrc
1.1       grant    1980:
                   1981: When installing packages as non-root user and using the just-in-time su(1)
                   1982: feature of pkgsrc, it can become annoying to type in the root password for each
                   1983: required package installed. To avoid this, the sudo package can be used, which
                   1984: does password caching over a limited time. To use it, install sudo (either as
                   1985: binary package or from security/sudo) and then put the following into your /etc
                   1986: /mk.conf:
                   1987:
1.51    ! rillig   1988:     .if exists(${LOCALBASE}/bin/sudo)
        !          1989:     SU_CMD=        ${LOCALBASE}/bin/sudo /bin/sh -c
        !          1990:     .endif
1.14      xtraeme  1991:
1.38      dillo    1992: 7.14. How do I change the location of configuration files?
1.1       grant    1993:
1.35      jmmv     1994: As the system administrator, you can choose where configuration files are
                   1995: installed. The default settings make all these files go into ${PREFIX}/etc or
                   1996: some of its subdirectories; this may be suboptimal depending on your
                   1997: expectations (e.g., a read-only, NFS-exported PREFIX with a need of per-machine
                   1998: configuration of the provided packages).
                   1999:
                   2000: In order to change the defaults, you can modify the PKG_SYSCONFBASE variable
                   2001: (in /etc/mk.conf) to point to your preferred configuration directory; some
                   2002: common examples include /etc or /etc/pkg.
                   2003:
                   2004: Furthermore, you can change this value on a per-package basis by setting the
                   2005: PKG_SYSCONFDIR.${PKG_SYSCONFVAR} variable. PKG_SYSCONFVAR's value usually
                   2006: matches the name of the package you would like to modify, that is, the contents
                   2007: of PKGBASE.
1.1       grant    2008:
1.47      reed     2009: Note that after changing these settings, you must rebuild and reinstall any
1.35      jmmv     2010: affected packages.
1.1       grant    2011:
1.38      dillo    2012: 7.15. Automated security checks
1.1       grant    2013:
                   2014: Please be aware that there can often be bugs in third-party software, and some
                   2015: of these bugs can leave a machine vulnerable to exploitation by attackers. In
                   2016: an effort to lessen the exposure, the NetBSD packages team maintains a database
                   2017: of known-exploits to packages which have at one time been included in pkgsrc.
                   2018: The database can be downloaded automatically, and a security audit of all
                   2019: packages installed on a system can take place. To do this, install the security
                   2020: /audit-packages package. It has two components:
                   2021:
1.34      wiz      2022:  1. download-vulnerability-list, an easy way to download a list of the security
                   2023:     vulnerabilities information. This list is kept up to date by the NetBSD
                   2024:     security officer and the NetBSD packages team, and is distributed from the
                   2025:     NetBSD ftp server:
1.20      ben      2026:
1.1       grant    2027:     ftp://ftp.NetBSD.org/pub/NetBSD/packages/distfiles/pkg-vulnerabilities
1.20      ben      2028:
1.34      wiz      2029:  2. audit-packages, an easy way to audit the current machine, checking each
1.1       grant    2030:     vulnerability which is known. If a vulnerable package is installed, it will
                   2031:     be shown by output to stdout, including a description of the type of
                   2032:     vulnerability, and a URL containing more information.
1.20      ben      2033:
1.23      wiz      2034: Use of the security/audit-packages package is strongly recommended! After
                   2035: "audit-packages" is installed, please read the package's message, which you can
                   2036: get by running pkg_info -D audit-package.
1.1       grant    2037:
1.48      dillo    2038: Part II. The pkgsrc developer's guide
1.1       grant    2039:
                   2040: Table of Contents
                   2041:
1.38      dillo    2042: 8. Package components - files, directories and contents
1.27      rillig   2043:
1.38      dillo    2044:     8.1. Makefile
                   2045:     8.2. distinfo
                   2046:     8.3. patches/*
                   2047:     8.4. Other mandatory files
                   2048:     8.5. Optional files
                   2049:     8.6. work*
                   2050:     8.7. files/*
1.27      rillig   2051:
1.38      dillo    2052: 9. Programming in Makefiles
1.25      rillig   2053:
1.38      dillo    2054:     9.1. Makefile variables
1.25      rillig   2055:
1.38      dillo    2056:         9.1.1. Naming conventions
1.27      rillig   2057:
1.38      dillo    2058:     9.2. Code snippets
1.27      rillig   2059:
1.38      dillo    2060:         9.2.1. Adding things to a list
                   2061:         9.2.2. Converting an internal list into an external list
                   2062:         9.2.3. Passing variables to a shell command
                   2063:         9.2.4. Quoting guideline
                   2064:         9.2.5. Workaround for a bug in BSD Make
1.20      ben      2065:
1.38      dillo    2066: 10. PLIST issues
1.20      ben      2067:
1.38      dillo    2068:     10.1. RCS ID
                   2069:     10.2. Semi-automatic PLIST generation
                   2070:     10.3. Tweaking output of make print-PLIST
                   2071:     10.4. Variable substitution in PLIST
1.48      dillo    2072:     10.5. Man page compression
1.38      dillo    2073:     10.6. Changing PLIST source with PLIST_SRC
1.47      reed     2074:     10.7. Platform-specific and differing PLISTs
1.38      dillo    2075:     10.8. Sharing directories between packages
1.20      ben      2076:
1.38      dillo    2077: 11. Buildlink methodology
1.20      ben      2078:
1.38      dillo    2079:     11.1. Converting packages to use buildlink3
                   2080:     11.2. Writing buildlink3.mk files
1.20      ben      2081:
1.38      dillo    2082:         11.2.1. Anatomy of a buildlink3.mk file
                   2083:         11.2.2. Updating BUILDLINK_DEPENDS. pkg in buildlink3.mk files
1.20      ben      2084:
1.38      dillo    2085:     11.3. Writing builtin.mk files
1.20      ben      2086:
1.38      dillo    2087:         11.3.1. Anatomy of a builtin.mk file
                   2088:         11.3.2. Global preferences for native or pkgsrc software
1.20      ben      2089:
1.38      dillo    2090: 12. The pkginstall framework
1.35      jmmv     2091:
1.38      dillo    2092:     12.1. Files and directories outside the installation prefix
1.20      ben      2093:
1.38      dillo    2094:         12.1.1. Directory manipulation
                   2095:         12.1.2. File manipulation
1.20      ben      2096:
1.38      dillo    2097:     12.2. Configuration files
1.20      ben      2098:
1.38      dillo    2099:         12.2.1. How PKG_SYSCONFDIR is set
1.47      reed     2100:         12.2.2. Telling the software where configuration files are
1.38      dillo    2101:         12.2.3. Patching installations
                   2102:         12.2.4. Disabling handling of configuration files
1.35      jmmv     2103:
1.38      dillo    2104:     12.3. System startup scripts
1.35      jmmv     2105:
1.38      dillo    2106:         12.3.1. Disabling handling of system startup scripts
1.35      jmmv     2107:
1.38      dillo    2108:     12.4. System users and groups
                   2109:     12.5. System shells
1.35      jmmv     2110:
1.38      dillo    2111:         12.5.1. Disabling handling of configuration files
1.35      jmmv     2112:
1.38      dillo    2113: 13. Options handling
1.35      jmmv     2114:
1.38      dillo    2115:     13.1. Global default options
                   2116:     13.2. Converting packages to use bsd.options.mk
1.48      dillo    2117:     13.3. Option Names
1.35      jmmv     2118:
1.38      dillo    2119: 14. The build process
1.35      jmmv     2120:
1.38      dillo    2121:     14.1. Program location
                   2122:     14.2. Main targets
                   2123:     14.3. Other helpful targets
1.35      jmmv     2124:
1.38      dillo    2125: 15. Notes on fixes for packages
1.35      jmmv     2126:
1.38      dillo    2127:     15.1. General operation
1.35      jmmv     2128:
1.38      dillo    2129:         15.1.1. How to pull in variables from /etc/mk.conf
                   2130:         15.1.2. Where to install documentation
                   2131:         15.1.3. Restricted packages
                   2132:         15.1.4. Handling dependencies
                   2133:         15.1.5. Handling conflicts with other packages
                   2134:         15.1.6. Packages that cannot or should not be built
                   2135:         15.1.7. Packages which should not be deleted, once installed
                   2136:         15.1.8. Handling packages with security problems
                   2137:         15.1.9. How to handle compiler bugs
                   2138:         15.1.10. How to handle incrementing versions when fixing an existing
1.1       grant    2139:             package
1.38      dillo    2140:         15.1.11. Portability of packages
1.25      rillig   2141:
1.38      dillo    2142:     15.2. Possible downloading issues
1.25      rillig   2143:
1.38      dillo    2144:         15.2.1. Packages whose distfiles aren't available for plain downloading
                   2145:         15.2.2. How to handle modified distfiles with the 'old' name
1.25      rillig   2146:
1.38      dillo    2147:     15.3. Configuration gotchas
1.25      rillig   2148:
1.38      dillo    2149:         15.3.1. Shared libraries - libtool
                   2150:         15.3.2. Using libtool on GNU packages that already support libtool
                   2151:         15.3.3. GNU Autoconf/Automake
1.35      jmmv     2152:
1.38      dillo    2153:     15.4. Building considerations
1.35      jmmv     2154:
1.38      dillo    2155:         15.4.1. CPP defines
1.51    ! rillig   2156:         15.4.2. Getting a list of CPP defines
1.35      jmmv     2157:
1.38      dillo    2158:     15.5. Package specific actions
1.35      jmmv     2159:
1.38      dillo    2160:         15.5.1. User interaction
                   2161:         15.5.2. Handling licenses
                   2162:         15.5.3. Installing score files
                   2163:         15.5.4. Packages containing perl scripts
                   2164:         15.5.5. Packages with hardcoded paths to other interpreters
                   2165:         15.5.6. Packages installing perl modules
                   2166:         15.5.7. Packages installing info files
                   2167:         15.5.8. Packages installing GConf2 data files
                   2168:         15.5.9. Packages installing scrollkeeper data files
                   2169:         15.5.10. Packages installing X11 fonts
                   2170:         15.5.11. Packages installing GTK2 modules
                   2171:         15.5.12. Packages installing SGML or XML data
                   2172:         15.5.13. Packages installing extensions to the MIME database
                   2173:         15.5.14. Packages using intltool
                   2174:         15.5.15. Packages installing startup scripts
1.35      jmmv     2175:
1.38      dillo    2176:     15.6. Feedback to the author
1.35      jmmv     2177:
1.38      dillo    2178: 16. Debugging
                   2179: 17. Submitting and Committing
1.35      jmmv     2180:
1.38      dillo    2181:     17.1. Submitting your packages
1.41      wiz      2182:     17.2. General notes when adding, updating, or removing packages
                   2183:     17.3. Committing: Importing a package into CVS
                   2184:     17.4. Updating a package to a newer version
                   2185:     17.5. Moving a package in pkgsrc
1.25      rillig   2186:
1.38      dillo    2187: Chapter 8. Package components - files, directories and contents
1.1       grant    2188:
                   2189: Table of Contents
                   2190:
1.38      dillo    2191: 8.1. Makefile
                   2192: 8.2. distinfo
                   2193: 8.3. patches/*
                   2194: 8.4. Other mandatory files
                   2195: 8.5. Optional files
                   2196: 8.6. work*
                   2197: 8.7. files/*
1.1       grant    2198:
                   2199: Whenever you're preparing a package, there are a number of files involved which
                   2200: are described in the following sections.
                   2201:
1.38      dillo    2202: 8.1. Makefile
1.1       grant    2203:
                   2204: Building, installation and creation of a binary package are all controlled by
1.23      wiz      2205: the package's Makefile. The Makefile describes various things about a package,
                   2206: for example from where to get it, how to configure, build, and install it.
                   2207:
                   2208: A package Makefile contains several sections that describe the package.
                   2209:
                   2210: In the first section there are the following variables, which should appear
                   2211: exactly in the order given here.
                   2212:
                   2213:   * DISTNAME is the basename of the distribution file to be downloaded from the
                   2214:     package's website.
                   2215:
                   2216:   * PKGNAME is the name of the package, as used by pkgsrc. You only need to
                   2217:     provide it if it differs from DISTNAME. Usually it is the directory name
1.27      rillig   2218:     together with the version number. It must match the regular expression ^
                   2219:     [A-Za-z0-9][A-Za-z0-9-_.+]*$, that is, it starts with a letter or digit,
                   2220:     and contains only letters, digits, dashes, underscores, dots and plus
                   2221:     signs.
1.23      wiz      2222:
                   2223:   * CATEGORIES is a list of categories which the package fits in. You can
                   2224:     choose any of the top-level directories of pkgsrc for it.
                   2225:
1.45      wiz      2226:     Currently the following values are available for CATEGORIES. If more than
                   2227:     one is used, they need to be separated by spaces:
                   2228:
1.51    ! rillig   2229:         archivers     cross         geography     meta-pkgs     security
        !          2230:         audio         databases     graphics      misc          shells
        !          2231:         benchmarks    devel         ham           multimedia    sysutils
        !          2232:         biology       editors       inputmethod   net           textproc
        !          2233:         cad           emulators     lang          news          time
        !          2234:         chat          finance       mail          parallel      wm
        !          2235:         comms         fonts         math          pkgtools      www
        !          2236:         converters    games         mbone         print         x11
1.45      wiz      2237:
1.23      wiz      2238:   * MASTER_SITES is a list of URLs where the distribution files can be
                   2239:     downloaded. Each URL must end with a slash.
                   2240:
1.45      wiz      2241:     The MASTER_SITES may make use of the following predefined sites:
1.23      wiz      2242:
1.51    ! rillig   2243:         ${MASTER_SITE_APACHE}
        !          2244:         ${MASTER_SITE_BACKUP}
        !          2245:         ${MASTER_SITE_CYGWIN}
        !          2246:         ${MASTER_SITE_DEBIAN}
        !          2247:         ${MASTER_SITE_FREEBSD}
        !          2248:         ${MASTER_SITE_FREEBSD_LOCAL}
        !          2249:         ${MASTER_SITE_GNOME}
        !          2250:         ${MASTER_SITE_GNU}
        !          2251:         ${MASTER_SITE_GNUSTEP}
        !          2252:         ${MASTER_SITE_IFARCHIVE}
        !          2253:         ${MASTER_SITE_MOZILLA}
        !          2254:         ${MASTER_SITE_OPENOFFICE}
        !          2255:         ${MASTER_SITE_PERL_CPAN}
        !          2256:         ${MASTER_SITE_R_CRAN}
        !          2257:         ${MASTER_SITE_SOURCEFORGE}
        !          2258:         ${MASTER_SITE_SUNSITE}
        !          2259:         ${MASTER_SITE_SUSE}
        !          2260:         ${MASTER_SITE_TEX_CTAN}
        !          2261:         ${MASTER_SITE_XCONTRIB}
        !          2262:         ${MASTER_SITE_XEMACS}
1.45      wiz      2263:
                   2264:     If one of these predefined sites is chosen, you may want to specify a
                   2265:     subdirectory of that site. Since these macros may expand to more than one
                   2266:     actual site, you must use the following construct to specify a
                   2267:     subdirectory:
                   2268:
1.51    ! rillig   2269:         ${MASTER_SITE_GNU:=subdirectory/name/}
        !          2270:         ${MASTER_SITE_SOURCEFORGE:=project_name/}
1.45      wiz      2271:
                   2272:     Note the trailing slash after the subdirectory name.
                   2273:
                   2274:     If the package has multiple DISTFILES or multiple PATCHFILES from different
1.47      reed     2275:     sites, set SITES_foo to a list of URIs where file "foo" may be found. "foo"
                   2276:     includes the suffix, e.g.:
1.45      wiz      2277:
1.51    ! rillig   2278:         DISTFILES=      ${DISTNAME}${EXTRACT_SUFX}
        !          2279:         DISTFILES+=     foo-file.tar.gz
        !          2280:         SITES_foo-file.tar.gz=http://www.somewhere.com/somehow/ \
        !          2281:                 http://www.somewhereelse.com/mirror/somehow/
1.45      wiz      2282:
                   2283:   * DISTFILES: Name(s) of archive file(s) containing distribution. The default
                   2284:     is ${DISTNAME}${EXTRACT_SUFX}. Should only be set if you have more than one
                   2285:     distfile.
                   2286:
                   2287:     Note that the normal default setting of DISTFILES must be made explicit if
                   2288:     you want to add to it (rather than replace it), as you usually would.
                   2289:
                   2290:   * EXTRACT_SUFX: Suffix of the distribution file, will be appended to
                   2291:     DISTNAME. Defaults to .tar.gz.
                   2292:
                   2293: The second section contains information about separately downloaded patches, if
                   2294: any.
                   2295:
1.47      reed     2296:   * PATCHFILES: Name(s) of additional files that contain distribution patches.
1.45      wiz      2297:     There is no default. pkgsrc will look for them at PATCH_SITES. They will
                   2298:     automatically be uncompressed before patching if the names end with .gz or
                   2299:     .Z.
                   2300:
                   2301:   * PATCH_SITES: Primary location(s) for distribution patch files (see
                   2302:     PATCHFILES below) if not found locally.
                   2303:
                   2304: The third section contains the following variables.
                   2305:
1.50      rillig   2306:   * MAINTAINER is the email address of the person who feels responsible for
                   2307:     this package, and who is most likely to look at problems or questions
                   2308:     regarding this package which have been reported with send-pr(1). Other
                   2309:     developers should contact the MAINTAINER before making major changes to the
                   2310:     package. When packaging a new program, set MAINTAINER to yourself. If you
                   2311:     really can't maintain the package for future updates, set it to <
                   2312:     tech-pkg@NetBSD.org>.
1.23      wiz      2313:
                   2314:   * HOMEPAGE is a URL where users can find more information about the package.
1.1       grant    2315:
1.45      wiz      2316:   * COMMENT is a one-line description of the package (should not include the
                   2317:     package name).
1.1       grant    2318:
1.45      wiz      2319: Other variables that affect the build:
1.1       grant    2320:
1.50      rillig   2321:   * WRKSRC: The directory where the interesting distribution files of the
                   2322:     package are found. The default is ${WRKDIR}/${DISTNAME}, which works for
                   2323:     most packages.
                   2324:
                   2325:     If a package doesn't create a subdirectory for itself (most GNU software
                   2326:     does, for instance), but extracts itself in the current directory, you
                   2327:     should set WRKSRC= ${WRKDIR}.
                   2328:
                   2329:     If a package doesn't create a subdirectory with the name of DISTNAME but
                   2330:     some different name, set WRKSRC to point to the proper name in ${WRKDIR},
                   2331:     for example WRKSRC= ${WRKDIR}/${DISTNAME}/unix. See lang/tcl and x11/tk for
                   2332:     other examples.
                   2333:
                   2334:     The name of the working directory created by pkgsrc is taken from the
                   2335:     WRKDIR_BASENAME variable. By default, its value is work. If you want to use
                   2336:     the same pkgsrc tree for building different kinds of binary packages, you
                   2337:     can change the variable according to your needs. Two other variables handle
                   2338:     common cases of setting WRKDIR_BASENAME individually. If OBJHOSTNAME is
                   2339:     defined in /etc/mk.conf, the first component of the host's name is attached
                   2340:     to the directory name. If OBJMACHINE is defined, the platform name is
                   2341:     attached, which might look like work.i386 or work.sparc.
1.1       grant    2342:
                   2343: Please pay attention to the following gotchas:
                   2344:
1.47      reed     2345:   * Add MANCOMPRESSED if man pages are installed in compressed form by the
1.1       grant    2346:     package; see comment in bsd.pkg.mk.
1.20      ben      2347:
1.1       grant    2348:   * Replace /usr/local with "${PREFIX}" in all files (see patches, below).
1.20      ben      2349:
1.38      dillo    2350:   * If the package installs any info files, see Section 15.5.7, "Packages
1.1       grant    2351:     installing info files".
1.20      ben      2352:
1.38      dillo    2353: 8.2. distinfo
1.1       grant    2354:
1.50      rillig   2355: The distinfo file contains the message digest, or checksum, of each distfile
                   2356: needed for the package. This ensures that the distfiles retrieved from the
                   2357: Internet have not been corrupted during transfer or altered by a malign force
                   2358: to introduce a security hole. Due to recent rumor about weaknesses of digest
                   2359: algorithms, all distfiles are protected using both SHA1 and RMD160 message
                   2360: digests, as well as the file size.
1.1       grant    2361:
1.50      rillig   2362: The distinfo file also contains the checksums for all the patches found in the
                   2363: patches directory (see Section 8.3, "patches/*").
                   2364:
                   2365: To regenerate the distinfo file, use the make makedistinfo or make mdi command.
                   2366:
                   2367: Some packages have different sets of distfiles depending on the platform, for
1.1       grant    2368: example www/navigator). These are kept in the same distinfo file and care
                   2369: should be taken when upgrading such a package to ensure distfile information is
                   2370: not lost.
                   2371:
1.38      dillo    2372: 8.3. patches/*
1.1       grant    2373:
                   2374: This directory contains files that are used by the patch(1) command to modify
                   2375: the sources as distributed in the distribution file into a form that will
                   2376: compile and run perfectly on NetBSD. The files are applied successively in
                   2377: alphabetic order (as returned by a shell "patches/patch-*" glob expansion), so
                   2378: patch-aa is applied before patch-ab, etc.
                   2379:
                   2380: The patch-* files should be in diff -bu format, and apply without a fuzz to
                   2381: avoid problems. (To force patches to apply with fuzz you can set
                   2382: PATCH_FUZZ_FACTOR=-F2). Furthermore, do not put changes for more than one file
1.47      reed     2383: into a single patch file, as this will make future modifications more
1.1       grant    2384: difficult.
                   2385:
                   2386: Similar, a file should be patched at most once, not several times by several
                   2387: different patches. If a file needs several patches, they should be combined
                   2388: into one file.
                   2389:
                   2390: One important thing to mention is to pay attention that no RCS IDs get stored
                   2391: in the patch files, as these will cause problems when later checked into the
                   2392: NetBSD CVS tree. Use the pkgdiff from the pkgtools/pkgdiff package to avoid
                   2393: these problems.
                   2394:
                   2395: For even more automation, we recommend using mkpatches from the same package to
                   2396: make a whole set of patches. You just have to backup files before you edit them
1.20      ben      2397: to filename.orig, e.g. with cp -p filename filename.orig or, easier, by using
1.1       grant    2398: pkgvi again from the same package. If you upgrade a package this way, you can
1.20      ben      2399: easily compare the new set of patches with the previously existing one with
1.1       grant    2400: patchdiff.
                   2401:
                   2402: When you have finished a package, remember to generate the checksums for the
1.38      dillo    2403: patch files by using the make makepatchsum command, see Section 8.2, "distinfo"
1.1       grant    2404: .
                   2405:
1.46      gdt      2406: When adding a patch that corrects a problem in the distfile (rather than e.g.
                   2407: enforcing pkgsrc's view of where man pages should go), send the patch as a bug
                   2408: report to the maintainer. This benefits non-pkgsrc users of the package, and
                   2409: usually enables removing the patch in future version.
                   2410:
1.1       grant    2411: Patch files that are distributed by the author or other maintainers can be
                   2412: listed in $PATCHFILES.
                   2413:
                   2414: If it is desired to store any patches that should not be committed into pkgsrc,
                   2415: they can be kept outside the pkgsrc tree in the $LOCALPATCHES directory. The
                   2416: directory tree there is expected to have the same "category/package" structure
                   2417: as pkgsrc, and patches are expected to be stored inside these dirs (also known
1.47      reed     2418: as $LOCALPATCHES/$PKGPATH). For example, if you want to keep a private patch
                   2419: for pkgsrc/graphics/png, keep it in $LOCALPATCHES/graphics/png/mypatch. All
                   2420: files in the named directory are expected to be patch files, and they are
                   2421: applied after pkgsrc patches are applied.
1.1       grant    2422:
1.38      dillo    2423: 8.4. Other mandatory files
1.1       grant    2424:
                   2425: DESCR
1.20      ben      2426:
1.1       grant    2427:     A multi-line description of the piece of software. This should include any
                   2428:     credits where they are due. Please bear in mind that others do not share
                   2429:     your sense of humour (or spelling idiosyncrasies), and that others will
                   2430:     read everything that you write here.
1.20      ben      2431:
1.1       grant    2432: PLIST
1.20      ben      2433:
1.1       grant    2434:     This file governs the files that are installed on your system: all the
                   2435:     binaries, manual pages, etc. There are other directives which may be
                   2436:     entered in this file, to control the creation and deletion of directories,
1.38      dillo    2437:     and the location of inserted files. See Chapter 10, PLIST issues for more
1.1       grant    2438:     information.
1.20      ben      2439:
1.38      dillo    2440: 8.5. Optional files
1.1       grant    2441:
                   2442: INSTALL
1.20      ben      2443:
1.1       grant    2444:     This shell script is invoked twice by pkg_add(1). First time after package
                   2445:     extraction and before files are moved in place, the second time after the
                   2446:     files to install are moved in place. This can be used to do any custom
1.20      ben      2447:     procedures not possible with @exec commands in PLIST. See pkg_add(1) and
1.1       grant    2448:     pkg_create(1) for more information.
1.20      ben      2449:
1.1       grant    2450: DEINSTALL
1.20      ben      2451:
1.1       grant    2452:     This script is executed before and after any files are removed. It is this
                   2453:     script's responsibility to clean up any additional messy details around the
                   2454:     package's installation, since all pkg_delete knows is how to delete the
1.20      ben      2455:     files created in the original distribution. See pkg_delete(1) and
1.1       grant    2456:     pkg_create(1) for more information.
1.20      ben      2457:
1.1       grant    2458: MESSAGE
1.20      ben      2459:
1.50      rillig   2460:     This file is displayed after installation of the package. Useful for things
                   2461:     like legal notices on almost-free software and hints for updating config
                   2462:     files after installing modules for apache, PHP etc. Please note that you
                   2463:     can modify variables in it easily by using MESSAGE_SUBST in the package's
1.1       grant    2464:     Makefile:
1.20      ben      2465:
1.51    ! rillig   2466:         MESSAGE_SUBST+=  SOMEVAR="somevalue"
1.20      ben      2467:
1.1       grant    2468:     replaces "${SOMEVAR}" with "somevalue" in MESSAGE.
1.20      ben      2469:
1.38      dillo    2470: 8.6. work*
1.1       grant    2471:
1.47      reed     2472: When you type make, the distribution files are unpacked into the directory
1.45      wiz      2473: denoted by WRKDIR. It can be removed by running make clean. Besides the
                   2474: sources, this directory is also used to keep various timestamp files. The
                   2475: directory gets removed completely on clean. The default is ${.CURDIR}/work or $
                   2476: {.CURDIR}/work.${MACHINE_ARCH} if OBJMACHINE is set.
1.1       grant    2477:
1.38      dillo    2478: 8.7. files/*
1.1       grant    2479:
                   2480: If you have any files that you wish to be placed in the package prior to
                   2481: configuration or building, you could place these files here and use a "${CP}"
                   2482: command in the "pre-configure" target to achieve this. Alternatively, you could
                   2483: simply diff the file against /dev/null and use the patch mechanism to manage
                   2484: the creation of this file.
                   2485:
1.38      dillo    2486: Chapter 9. Programming in Makefiles
1.27      rillig   2487:
                   2488: Table of Contents
                   2489:
1.38      dillo    2490: 9.1. Makefile variables
1.27      rillig   2491:
1.38      dillo    2492:     9.1.1. Naming conventions
1.27      rillig   2493:
1.38      dillo    2494: 9.2. Code snippets
1.27      rillig   2495:
1.38      dillo    2496:     9.2.1. Adding things to a list
                   2497:     9.2.2. Converting an internal list into an external list
                   2498:     9.2.3. Passing variables to a shell command
                   2499:     9.2.4. Quoting guideline
                   2500:     9.2.5. Workaround for a bug in BSD Make
1.27      rillig   2501:
                   2502: Pkgsrc consists of many Makefile fragments, each of which forms a well-defined
                   2503: part of the pkgsrc system. Using the make(1) system as a programming language
                   2504: for a big system like pkgsrc requires some discipline to keep the code correct
                   2505: and understandable.
                   2506:
                   2507: The basic ingredients for Makefile programming are variables (which are
                   2508: actually macros) and shell commands. Among these shell commands may even be
                   2509: more complex ones like awk(1) programs. To make sure that every shell command
                   2510: runs as intended it is necessary to quote all variables correctly when they are
                   2511: used.
                   2512:
                   2513: This chapter describes some patterns, that appear quite often in Makefiles,
                   2514: including the pitfalls that come along with them.
                   2515:
1.38      dillo    2516: 9.1. Makefile variables
1.27      rillig   2517:
                   2518: Makefile variables contain strings that can be processed using the five
                   2519: operators ``='', ``+='', ``?='', ``:='', and ``!='', which are described in the
                   2520: make(1) man page.
                   2521:
                   2522: When a variable's value is parsed from a Makefile, the hash character ``#'' and
                   2523: the backslash character ``\'' are handled specially. If a backslash is followed
                   2524: by a newline, any whitespace immediately in front of the backslash, the
                   2525: backslash, the newline, and any whitespace immediately behind the newline are
                   2526: replaced with a single space. A backspace character and an immediately
1.47      reed     2527: following hash character are replaced with a single hash character. Otherwise,
1.27      rillig   2528: the backslash is passed as is. In a variable assignment, any hash character
                   2529: that is not preceded by a backslash starts a comment that continues upto the
                   2530: end of the logical line.
                   2531:
                   2532: Note: Because of this parsing algorithm the only way to create a variable
                   2533: consisting of a single backslash is using the ``!='' operator, for example:
                   2534: BACKSLASH!=echo "\\".
                   2535:
                   2536: So far for defining variables. The other thing you can do with variables is
                   2537: evaluating them. A variable is evaluated when it is part of the right side of
                   2538: the ``:='' or the ``!='' operator, or directly before executing a shell command
1.47      reed     2539: which the variable is part of. In all other cases, make(1) performs lazy
1.27      rillig   2540: evaluation, that is, variables are not evaluated until there's no other way.
                   2541: The ``modifiers'' mentioned in the man page also evaluate the variable.
                   2542:
                   2543: Some of the modifiers split the string into words and then operate on the
1.47      reed     2544: words, others operate on the string as a whole. When a string is split into
                   2545: words, it is split as you would expect it from sh(1).
1.27      rillig   2546:
                   2547: No rule without exception?the .for loop does not follow the shell quoting rules
                   2548: but splits at sequences of whitespace.
                   2549:
                   2550: There are several types of variables that should be handled differently.
                   2551: Strings and two types of lists.
                   2552:
1.47      reed     2553:   * Strings can contain arbitrary characters. Nevertheless, you should restrict
1.27      rillig   2554:     yourself to only using printable characters. Examples are PREFIX and
                   2555:     COMMENT.
                   2556:
                   2557:   * Internal lists are lists that are never exported to any shell command.
1.47      reed     2558:     Their elements are separated by whitespace. Therefore, the elements
1.27      rillig   2559:     themselves cannot have embedded whitespace. Any other characters are
                   2560:     allowed. Internal lists can be used in .for loops. Examples are DEPENDS and
                   2561:     BUILD_DEPENDS.
                   2562:
                   2563:   * External lists are lists that may be exported to a shell command. Their
                   2564:     elements can contain any characters, including whitespace. That's why they
                   2565:     cannot be used in .for loops. Examples are DISTFILES and MASTER_SITES.
                   2566:
1.38      dillo    2567: 9.1.1. Naming conventions
1.27      rillig   2568:
                   2569:   * All variable names starting with an underscore are reserved for use by the
                   2570:     pkgsrc infrastructure. They shall not be used by package Makefiles.
                   2571:
                   2572:   * In .for loops you should use lowercase variable names for the iteration
                   2573:     variables.
                   2574:
                   2575:   * All list variables should have a ``plural'' name, e.g. PKG_OPTIONS or
                   2576:     DISTFILES.
                   2577:
1.38      dillo    2578: 9.2. Code snippets
1.27      rillig   2579:
                   2580: This section presents you with some code snippets you should use in your own
                   2581: code. If you don't find anything appropriate here, you should test your code
                   2582: and add it here.
                   2583:
1.38      dillo    2584: 9.2.1. Adding things to a list
1.27      rillig   2585:
1.51    ! rillig   2586:     STRING=                 foo * bar `date`
        !          2587:     INT_LIST=               # empty
        !          2588:     ANOTHER_INT_LIST=       apache-[0-9]*:../../www/apache
        !          2589:     EXT_LIST=               # empty
        !          2590:     ANOTHER_EXT_LIST=       a=b c=d
        !          2591:
        !          2592:     INT_LIST+=              ${STRING}               # 1
        !          2593:     INT_LIST+=              ${ANOTHER_INT_LIST}     # 2
        !          2594:     EXT_LIST+=              ${STRING:Q}             # 3
        !          2595:     EXT_LIST+=              ${ANOTHER_EXT_LIST}     # 4
1.27      rillig   2596:
                   2597: When you add a string to an external list (example 3), it must be quoted. In
                   2598: all other cases, you must not add a quoting level. You must not merge internal
                   2599: and external lists, unless you are sure that all entries are correctly
                   2600: interpreted in both lists.
                   2601:
1.38      dillo    2602: 9.2.2. Converting an internal list into an external list
1.27      rillig   2603:
1.51    ! rillig   2604:     EXT_LIST=       # empty
        !          2605:     .for i in ${INT_LIST}
        !          2606:     EXT_LIST+=      ${i:Q}""
        !          2607:     .endfor
1.27      rillig   2608:
                   2609: This code converts the internal list INT_LIST into the external list EXT_LIST.
                   2610: As the elements of an internal list are unquoted they must be quoted here. The
                   2611: reason for appending "" is explained below.
                   2612:
1.38      dillo    2613: 9.2.3. Passing variables to a shell command
1.27      rillig   2614:
1.51    ! rillig   2615:     STRING=         foo bar <    > * `date` $$HOME ' "
        !          2616:     EXT_LIST=       string=${STRING:Q} x=second\ item
1.27      rillig   2617:
1.51    ! rillig   2618:     all:
        !          2619:             echo ${STRING}                  # 1
        !          2620:             echo "${STRING}"                # 2
        !          2621:             echo "${STRING:Q}"              # 3
        !          2622:             echo ${STRING:Q}                # 4
        !          2623:             echo x${STRING:Q} | sed 1s,.,,  # 5
        !          2624:             env ${EXT_LIST} /bin/sh -c 'echo "$$string"; echo "$$x"'
1.27      rillig   2625:
                   2626: Example 1 leads to a syntax error in the shell, as the characters are just
                   2627: copied.
                   2628:
                   2629: Example 2 leads to a syntax error too, and if you leave out the last "
                   2630: character from ${STRING}, date(1) will be executed. The $HOME shell variable
                   2631: would be evaluated, too.
                   2632:
                   2633: Example 3 outputs each space character preceded by a backslash (or not),
                   2634: depending on the implementation of the echo(1) command.
                   2635:
                   2636: Example 4 handles correctly every string that does not start with a dash. In
                   2637: that case, the result depends on the implementation of the echo(1) command. As
1.47      reed     2638: long as you can guarantee that your input does not start with a dash, this form
1.27      rillig   2639: is appropriate.
                   2640:
                   2641: Example 5 handles even the case of a leading dash correctly.
                   2642:
1.47      reed     2643: The EXT_LIST does not need to be quoted because the quoting has already been
                   2644: done when adding elements to the list.
1.27      rillig   2645:
                   2646: As internal lists shall not be passed to the shell, there is no example for it.
                   2647:
1.38      dillo    2648: 9.2.4. Quoting guideline
1.27      rillig   2649:
                   2650: There are many possible sources of wrongly quoted variables. This section lists
                   2651: some of the commonly known ones.
                   2652:
                   2653:   * Whenever you use the value of a list, think about what happens to leading
1.47      reed     2654:     or trailing whitespace. If the list is a well-formed shell expression, you
1.27      rillig   2655:     can apply the :M* modifier to strip leading and trailing whitespace from
                   2656:     each word. The :M operator first splits its argument according to the rules
                   2657:     of the shell, and then creates a new list consisting of all words that
                   2658:     match the shell glob expression *, that is: all. One class of situations
                   2659:     where this is needed is when adding a variable like CPPFLAGS to
1.47      reed     2660:     CONFIGURE_ARGS. If the configure script invokes other configure scripts, it
1.27      rillig   2661:     strips the leading and trailing whitespace from the variable and then
                   2662:     passes it to the other configure scripts. But these configure scripts
                   2663:     expect the (child) CPPFLAGS variable to be the same as the parent CPPFLAGS.
                   2664:     That's why we better pass the CPPFLAGS value properly trimmed. And here is
                   2665:     how we do it:
                   2666:
1.51    ! rillig   2667:         CPPFLAGS=               # empty
        !          2668:         CPPFLAGS+=              -Wundef -DPREFIX=\"${PREFIX:Q}\"
        !          2669:         CPPFLAGS+=              ${MY_CPPFLAGS}
        !          2670:
        !          2671:         CONFIGURE_ARGS+=        CPPFLAGS=${CPPFLAGS:M*:Q}
        !          2672:
        !          2673:         all:
        !          2674:                 echo x${CPPFLAGS:Q}x            # leading and trailing whitespace
        !          2675:                 echo x${CONFIGURE_ARGS}x        # properly trimmed
1.27      rillig   2676:
                   2677:   * The example above contains one bug: The ${PREFIX} is a properly quoted
                   2678:     shell expression, but there is the C compiler after it, which also expects
                   2679:     a properly quoted string (this time in C syntax). The version above is
                   2680:     therefore only correct if ${PREFIX} does not have embedded backslashes or
                   2681:     double quotes. If you want to allow these, you have to add another layer of
                   2682:     quoting to each variable that is used as a C string literal. You cannot use
                   2683:     the :Q operator for it, as this operator only works for the shell.
                   2684:
1.47      reed     2685:   * Whenever a variable can be empty, the :Q operator can have surprising
1.27      rillig   2686:     results. Here are two completely different cases which can be solved with
                   2687:     the same trick.
                   2688:
1.51    ! rillig   2689:         EMPTY=                  # empty
        !          2690:         empty_test:
        !          2691:                 for i in a ${EMPTY:Q} c; do \
        !          2692:                         echo "$$i"; \
        !          2693:                 done
        !          2694:
        !          2695:         for_test:
        !          2696:         .for i in a:\ a:\test.txt
        !          2697:                 echo ${i:Q}
        !          2698:                 echo "foo"
        !          2699:         .endfor
1.27      rillig   2700:
                   2701:     The first example will only print two of the three lines we might have
                   2702:     expected. This is because ${EMPTY:Q} expands to the empty string, which the
                   2703:     shell cannot see. The workaround is to write ${EMPTY:Q}"". This pattern can
                   2704:     be often found as ${TEST} -z ${VAR:Q} or as ${TEST} -f ${FNAME:Q} (both of
                   2705:     these are wrong).
                   2706:
                   2707:     The second example will only print three lines instead of four. The first
                   2708:     line looks like a:\ echo foo. This is because the backslash of the value a:
                   2709:     \ is interpreted as a line-continuation by make(1), which makes the second
                   2710:     line the arguments of the echo(1) command from the first line. To avoid
                   2711:     this, write ${i:Q}"".
                   2712:
1.38      dillo    2713: 9.2.5. Workaround for a bug in BSD Make
1.27      rillig   2714:
                   2715: The pkgsrc bmake program does not handle the following assignment correctly. In
                   2716: case _othervar_ contains a ``-'' character, one of the closing braces is
                   2717: included in ${VAR} after this code executes.
                   2718:
1.51    ! rillig   2719:     VAR:=   ${VAR:N${_othervar_:C/-//}}
1.27      rillig   2720:
                   2721: For a more complex code snippet and a workaround, see the package regress/
                   2722: make-quoting, testcase bug1.
                   2723:
1.38      dillo    2724: Chapter 10. PLIST issues
1.1       grant    2725:
                   2726: Table of Contents
                   2727:
1.38      dillo    2728: 10.1. RCS ID
                   2729: 10.2. Semi-automatic PLIST generation
                   2730: 10.3. Tweaking output of make print-PLIST
                   2731: 10.4. Variable substitution in PLIST
1.48      dillo    2732: 10.5. Man page compression
1.38      dillo    2733: 10.6. Changing PLIST source with PLIST_SRC
1.47      reed     2734: 10.7. Platform-specific and differing PLISTs
1.38      dillo    2735: 10.8. Sharing directories between packages
1.1       grant    2736:
                   2737: The PLIST file contains a package's "packing list", i.e. a list of files that
                   2738: belong to the package (relative to the ${PREFIX} directory it's been installed
1.47      reed     2739: in) plus some additional statements - see the pkg_create(1) man page for a full
1.1       grant    2740: list. This chapter addresses some issues that need attention when dealing with
                   2741: the PLIST file (or files, see below!).
                   2742:
1.38      dillo    2743: 10.1. RCS ID
1.1       grant    2744:
                   2745: Be sure to add a RCS ID line as the first thing in any PLIST file you write:
                   2746:
1.51    ! rillig   2747:     @comment $NetBSD$
1.1       grant    2748:
1.38      dillo    2749: 10.2. Semi-automatic PLIST generation
1.1       grant    2750:
                   2751: You can use the make print-PLIST command to output a PLIST that matches any new
1.38      dillo    2752: files since the package was extracted. See Section 14.3, "Other helpful
1.1       grant    2753: targets" for more information on this target.
                   2754:
1.38      dillo    2755: 10.3. Tweaking output of make print-PLIST
1.1       grant    2756:
1.38      dillo    2757: If you have used any of the *-dirs packages, as explained in Section 10.8,
1.1       grant    2758: "Sharing directories between packages", you may have noticed that make
                   2759: print-PLIST outputs a set of @comments instead of real @dirrm lines. You can
                   2760: also do this for specific directories and files, so that the results of that
                   2761: command are very close to reality. This helps a lot during the update of
                   2762: packages.
                   2763:
                   2764: The PRINT_PLIST_AWK variable takes a set of AWK patterns and actions that are
                   2765: used to filter the output of print-PLIST. You can append any chunk of AWK
                   2766: scripting you like to it, but be careful with quoting.
                   2767:
                   2768: For example, to get all files inside the libdata/foo directory removed from the
                   2769: resulting PLIST:
                   2770:
1.51    ! rillig   2771:     PRINT_PLIST_AWK+=       /^libdata\/foo/ { next; }
1.1       grant    2772:
                   2773: And to get all the @dirrm lines referring to a specific (shared) directory
                   2774: converted to @comments:
                   2775:
1.51    ! rillig   2776:     PRINT_PLIST_AWK+=       /^@dirrm share\/specific/ { print "@comment " $$0; next; }
1.1       grant    2777:
1.38      dillo    2778: 10.4. Variable substitution in PLIST
1.1       grant    2779:
                   2780: A number of variables are substituted automatically in PLISTs when a package is
                   2781: installed on a system. This includes the following variables:
                   2782:
                   2783: ${MACHINE_ARCH}, ${MACHINE_GNU_ARCH}
1.20      ben      2784:
1.1       grant    2785:     Some packages like emacs and perl embed information about which
                   2786:     architecture they were built on into the pathnames where they install their
1.47      reed     2787:     files. To handle this case, PLIST will be preprocessed before actually
                   2788:     used, and the symbol "${MACHINE_ARCH}" will be replaced by what uname -p
                   2789:     gives. The same is done if the string ${MACHINE_GNU_ARCH} is embedded in
                   2790:     PLIST somewhere - use this on packages that have GNU autoconf-created
                   2791:     configure scripts.
1.20      ben      2792:
1.1       grant    2793:     Legacy note
1.20      ben      2794:
1.1       grant    2795:     There used to be a symbol "$ARCH" that was replaced by the output of uname
                   2796:     -m, but that's no longer supported and has been removed.
1.20      ben      2797:
1.1       grant    2798: ${OPSYS}, ${LOWER_OPSYS}, ${OS_VERSION}
1.20      ben      2799:
1.1       grant    2800:     Some packages want to embed the OS name and version into some paths. To do
                   2801:     this, use these variables in the PLIST:
1.20      ben      2802:
1.1       grant    2803:       * ${OPSYS} - output of "uname -s"
1.20      ben      2804:
1.1       grant    2805:       * ${LOWER_OPSYS} - lowercase common name (eg. "solaris")
1.20      ben      2806:
1.1       grant    2807:       * ${OS_VERSION} - "uname -r"
1.20      ben      2808:
1.1       grant    2809: ${PKGLOCALEDIR}
1.20      ben      2810:
1.1       grant    2811:     Packages that install locale files should list them in the PLIST as "$
                   2812:     {PKGLOCALEDIR}/locale/de/LC_MESSAGES/..." instead of "share/locale/de/
                   2813:     LC_MESSAGES/...". This properly handles the fact that different operating
                   2814:     systems expect locale files to be either in share or lib by default.
1.20      ben      2815:
1.1       grant    2816: For a complete list of values which are replaced by default, please look in
                   2817: bsd.pkg.mk (and search for PLIST_SUBST).
                   2818:
                   2819: If you want to change other variables not listed above, you can add variables
                   2820: and their expansions to this variable in the following way, similar to
1.38      dillo    2821: MESSAGE_SUBST (see Section 8.5, "Optional files"):
1.1       grant    2822:
1.51    ! rillig   2823:     PLIST_SUBST+=   SOMEVAR="somevalue"
1.1       grant    2824:
                   2825: This replaces all occurrences of "${SOMEVAR}" in the PLIST with "somevalue".
                   2826:
1.48      dillo    2827: 10.5. Man page compression
1.1       grant    2828:
1.47      reed     2829: Man pages should be installed in compressed form if MANZ is set (in
                   2830: bsd.own.mk), and uncompressed otherwise. To handle this in the PLIST file, the
                   2831: suffix ".gz" is appended/removed automatically for man pages according to MANZ
                   2832: and MANCOMPRESSED being set or not, see above for details. This modification of
                   2833: the PLIST file is done on a copy of it, not PLIST itself.
1.1       grant    2834:
1.38      dillo    2835: 10.6. Changing PLIST source with PLIST_SRC
1.1       grant    2836:
                   2837: To use one or more files as source for the PLIST used in generating the binary
                   2838: package, set the variable PLIST_SRC to the names of that file(s). The files are
                   2839: later concatenated using cat(1), and order of things is important.
                   2840:
1.47      reed     2841: 10.7. Platform-specific and differing PLISTs
1.1       grant    2842:
                   2843: Some packages decide to install a different set of files based on the operating
                   2844: system being used. These differences can be automatically handled by using the
                   2845: following files:
                   2846:
                   2847:   * PLIST.common
1.20      ben      2848:
1.1       grant    2849:   * PLIST.${OPSYS}
1.20      ben      2850:
1.21      ben      2851:   * PLIST.${MACHINE_ARCH}
                   2852:
                   2853:   * PLIST.${OPSYS}-${MACHINE_ARCH}
                   2854:
1.1       grant    2855:   * PLIST.common_end
                   2856:
1.38      dillo    2857: 10.8. Sharing directories between packages
1.1       grant    2858:
                   2859: A "shared directory" is a directory where multiple (and unrelated) packages
                   2860: install files. These directories are problematic because you have to add
                   2861: special tricks in the PLIST to conditionally remove them, or have some
                   2862: centralized package handle them.
                   2863:
                   2864: Within pkgsrc, you'll find both approaches. If a directory is shared by a few
                   2865: unrelated packages, it's often not worth to add an extra package to remove it.
                   2866: Therefore, one simply does:
                   2867:
1.51    ! rillig   2868:     @unexec ${RMDIR} %D/path/to/shared/directory 2>/dev/null || ${TRUE}
1.1       grant    2869:
                   2870: in the PLISTs of all affected packages, instead of the regular "@dirrm" line.
                   2871:
                   2872: However, if the directory is shared across many packages, two different
                   2873: solutions are available:
                   2874:
                   2875:  1. If the packages have a common dependency, the directory can be removed in
                   2876:     that. For example, see textproc/scrollkeeper, which removes the shared
                   2877:     directory share/omf.
1.20      ben      2878:
1.1       grant    2879:  2. If the packages using the directory are not related at all (they have no
                   2880:     common dependencies), a *-dirs package is used.
1.20      ben      2881:
1.1       grant    2882: From now on, we'll discuss the second solution. To get an idea of the *-dirs
                   2883: packages available, issue:
                   2884:
1.51    ! rillig   2885:     % cd .../pkgsrc
        !          2886:     % ls -d */*-dirs
1.1       grant    2887:
                   2888: Their use from other packages is very simple. The USE_DIRS variable takes a
                   2889: list of package names (without the "-dirs" part) together with the required
1.34      wiz      2890: version number (always pick the latest one when writing new packages).
1.1       grant    2891:
                   2892: For example, if a package installs files under share/applications, it should
                   2893: have the following line in it:
                   2894:
1.51    ! rillig   2895:     USE_DIRS+=      xdg-1.1
1.1       grant    2896:
                   2897: After regenerating the PLIST using make print-PLIST, you should get the right
                   2898: (commented out) lines.
                   2899:
1.47      reed     2900: Note that even if your package is using $X11BASE, it must not depend on the
1.1       grant    2901: *-x11-dirs packages. Just specify the name without that part and pkgsrc (in
                   2902: particular, mk/dirs.mk) will take care of it.
                   2903:
1.38      dillo    2904: Chapter 11. Buildlink methodology
1.1       grant    2905:
                   2906: Table of Contents
                   2907:
1.38      dillo    2908: 11.1. Converting packages to use buildlink3
                   2909: 11.2. Writing buildlink3.mk files
1.20      ben      2910:
1.38      dillo    2911:     11.2.1. Anatomy of a buildlink3.mk file
                   2912:     11.2.2. Updating BUILDLINK_DEPENDS.pkg in buildlink3.mk files
1.20      ben      2913:
1.38      dillo    2914: 11.3. Writing builtin.mk files
1.20      ben      2915:
1.38      dillo    2916:     11.3.1. Anatomy of a builtin.mk file
                   2917:     11.3.2. Global preferences for native or pkgsrc software
1.20      ben      2918:
1.1       grant    2919: Buildlink is a framework in pkgsrc that controls what headers and libraries are
                   2920: seen by a package's configure and build processes. This is implemented in a two
                   2921: step process:
                   2922:
                   2923:  1. Symlink headers and libraries for dependencies into BUILDLINK_DIR, which by
                   2924:     default is a subdirectory of WRKDIR.
1.20      ben      2925:
1.1       grant    2926:  2. Create wrapper scripts that are used in place of the normal compiler tools
                   2927:     that translate -I${LOCALBASE}/include and -L${LOCALBASE}/lib into
                   2928:     references to BUILDLINK_DIR. The wrapper scripts also make native compiler
                   2929:     on some operating systems look like GCC, so that packages that expect GCC
                   2930:     won't require modifications to build with those native compilers.
1.20      ben      2931:
1.1       grant    2932: This normalizes the environment in which a package is built so that the package
                   2933: may be built consistently despite what other software may be installed. Please
                   2934: note that the normal system header and library paths, e.g. /usr/include, /usr/
                   2935: lib, etc., are always searched -- buildlink3 is designed to insulate the
                   2936: package build from non-system-supplied software.
                   2937:
1.38      dillo    2938: 11.1. Converting packages to use buildlink3
1.1       grant    2939:
                   2940: The process of converting packages to use the buildlink3 framework
                   2941: ("bl3ifying") is fairly straightforward. The things to keep in mind are:
                   2942:
1.22      tv       2943:  1. Ensure that the build always calls the wrapper scripts instead of the
1.1       grant    2944:     actual toolchain. Some packages are tricky, and the only way to know for
                   2945:     sure is the check ${WRKDIR}/.work.log to see if the wrappers are being
                   2946:     invoked.
1.20      ben      2947:
1.22      tv       2948:  2. Don't override PREFIX from within the package Makefile, e.g. Java VMs,
1.1       grant    2949:     standalone shells, etc., because the code to symlink files into $
                   2950:     {BUILDLINK_DIR} looks for files relative to "pkg_info -qp pkgname".
1.20      ben      2951:
1.22      tv       2952:  3. Remember that only the buildlink3.mk files that you list in a package's
1.1       grant    2953:     Makefile are added as dependencies for that package.
1.20      ben      2954:
1.1       grant    2955: If a dependency on a particular package is required for its libraries and
                   2956: headers, then we replace:
                   2957:
1.51    ! rillig   2958:     DEPENDS+=   foo>=1.1.0:../../category/foo
1.1       grant    2959:
                   2960: with
                   2961:
1.51    ! rillig   2962:     .include "../../category/foo/buildlink3.mk"
1.1       grant    2963:
1.47      reed     2964: The buildlink3.mk files usually define the required dependencies. If you need a
                   2965: newer version of the dependency when using buildlink3.mk files, then you can
                   2966: define it in your Makefile; for example:
                   2967:
1.51    ! rillig   2968:     BUILDLINK_DEPENDS.foo+=   foo>=1.1.0
        !          2969:     .include "../../category/foo/buildlink3.mk"
1.47      reed     2970:
1.1       grant    2971: There are several buildlink3.mk files in pkgsrc/mk that handle special package
                   2972: issues:
                   2973:
                   2974:   * bdb.buildlink3.mk chooses either the native or a pkgsrc Berkeley DB
                   2975:     implementation based on the values of BDB_ACCEPTED and BDB_DEFAULT.
1.20      ben      2976:
1.47      reed     2977:   * curses.buildlink3.mk: If the system comes with neither Curses nor NCurses,
1.1       grant    2978:     this will take care to install the devel/ncurses package.
1.20      ben      2979:
1.1       grant    2980:   * krb5.buildlink3.mk uses the value of KRB5_ACCEPTED to choose between adding
                   2981:     a dependency on Heimdal or MIT-krb5 for packages that require a Kerberos 5
                   2982:     implementation.
1.20      ben      2983:
1.1       grant    2984:   * motif.buildlink3.mk checks for a system-provided Motif installation or adds
1.47      reed     2985:     a dependency on x11/lesstif or x11/openmotif.
1.20      ben      2986:
1.1       grant    2987:   * ossaudio.buildlink3.mk defines several variables that may be used by
1.47      reed     2988:     packages that use the Open Sound System (OSS) API.
1.20      ben      2989:
1.1       grant    2990:   * pgsql.buildlink3.mk will accept either Postgres 7.3 or 7.4, whichever is
                   2991:     found installed. See the file for more information.
1.20      ben      2992:
1.1       grant    2993:   * pthread.buildlink3.mk uses the value of PTHREAD_OPTS and checks for native
1.47      reed     2994:     pthreads or adds a dependency on devel/pth as needed.
1.20      ben      2995:
1.1       grant    2996:   * xaw.buildlink3.mk uses the value of XAW_TYPE to choose a particular Athena
                   2997:     widgets library.
1.20      ben      2998:
1.1       grant    2999: The comments in those buildlink3.mk files provide a more complete description
                   3000: of how to use them properly.
                   3001:
1.38      dillo    3002: 11.2. Writing buildlink3.mk files
1.1       grant    3003:
                   3004: A package's buildlink3.mk file is included by Makefiles to indicate the need to
                   3005: compile and link against header files and libraries provided by the package. A
                   3006: buildlink3.mk file should always provide enough information to add the correct
                   3007: type of dependency relationship and include any other buildlink3.mk files that
                   3008: it needs to find headers and libraries that it needs in turn.
                   3009:
1.20      ben      3010: To generate an initial buildlink3.mk file for further editing, Rene Hexel's
1.1       grant    3011: pkgtools/createbuildlink package is highly recommended. For most packages, the
                   3012: following command will generate a good starting point for buildlink3.mk files:
                   3013:
                   3014: % cd pkgsrc/category/pkgdir
1.49      rillig   3015: % createbuildlink >buildlink3.mk
1.1       grant    3016:
1.38      dillo    3017: 11.2.1. Anatomy of a buildlink3.mk file
1.1       grant    3018:
                   3019: The following real-life example buildlink3.mk is taken from pkgsrc/graphics/
                   3020: tiff:
                   3021:
1.51    ! rillig   3022:     # $NetBSD: buildlink3.mk,v 1.7 2004/03/18 09:12:12 jlam Exp $
1.1       grant    3023:
1.51    ! rillig   3024:     BUILDLINK_DEPTH:=       ${BUILDLINK_DEPTH}+
        !          3025:     TIFF_BUILDLINK3_MK:=    ${TIFF_BUILDLINK3_MK}+
1.1       grant    3026:
1.51    ! rillig   3027:     .if !empty(BUILDLINK_DEPTH:M+)
        !          3028:     BUILDLINK_DEPENDS+=     tiff
        !          3029:     .endif
1.1       grant    3030:
1.51    ! rillig   3031:     BUILDLINK_PACKAGES:=    ${BUILDLINK_PACKAGES:Ntiff}
        !          3032:     BUILDLINK_PACKAGES+=    tiff
1.1       grant    3033:
1.51    ! rillig   3034:     .if !empty(TIFF_BUILDLINK3_MK:M+)
        !          3035:     BUILDLINK_DEPENDS.tiff+=        tiff>=3.6.1
        !          3036:     BUILDLINK_PKGSRCDIR.tiff?=      ../../graphics/tiff
        !          3037:     .endif  # TIFF_BUILDLINK3_MK
1.1       grant    3038:
1.51    ! rillig   3039:     .include "../../devel/zlib/buildlink3.mk"
        !          3040:     .include "../../graphics/jpeg/buildlink3.mk"
1.1       grant    3041:
1.51    ! rillig   3042:     BUILDLINK_DEPTH:=       ${BUILDLINK_DEPTH:S/+$//}
1.1       grant    3043:
                   3044: The header and footer manipulate BUILDLINK_DEPTH, which is common across all
                   3045: buildlink3.mk files and is used to track at what depth we are including
                   3046: buildlink3.mk files.
                   3047:
                   3048: The first section controls if the dependency on pkg is added. BUILDLINK_DEPENDS
                   3049: is the global list of packages for which dependencies are added by buildlink3.
                   3050:
                   3051: The second section advises pkgsrc that the buildlink3.mk file for pkg has been
                   3052: included at some point. BUILDLINK_PACKAGES is the global list of packages for
                   3053: which buildlink3.mk files have been included. It must always be appended to
                   3054: within a buildlink3.mk file.
                   3055:
                   3056: The third section is protected from multiple inclusion and controls how the
                   3057: dependency on pkg is added. Several important variables are set in the section:
                   3058:
1.14      xtraeme  3059:   * BUILDLINK_DEPENDS.pkg is the actual dependency recorded in the installed
1.1       grant    3060:     package; this should always be set using += to ensure that we're appending
                   3061:     to any pre-existing list of values. This variable should be set to the
                   3062:     first version of the package that had the last change in the major number
                   3063:     of a shared library or that had a major API change.
1.20      ben      3064:
1.47      reed     3065:   * BUILDLINK_PKGSRCDIR.pkg is the location of the pkg pkgsrc directory.
1.20      ben      3066:
1.1       grant    3067:   * BUILDLINK_DEPMETHOD.pkg (not shown above) controls whether we use
                   3068:     BUILD_DEPENDS or DEPENDS to add the dependency on pkg. The build dependency
                   3069:     is selected by setting BUILDLINK_DEPMETHOD.pkg to "build". By default, the
                   3070:     full dependency is used.
1.20      ben      3071:
1.14      xtraeme  3072:   * BUILDLINK_INCDIRS.pkg and BUILDLINK_LIBDIRS. pkg (not shown above) are
1.1       grant    3073:     lists of subdirectories of ${BUILDLINK_PREFIX.pkg} to add to the header and
                   3074:     library search paths. These default to "include" and "lib" respectively.
1.20      ben      3075:
1.1       grant    3076:   * BUILDLINK_CPPFLAGS.pkg (not shown above) is the list of preprocessor flags
                   3077:     to add to CPPFLAGS, which are passed on to the configure and build phases.
                   3078:     The "-I" option should be avoided and instead be handled using
                   3079:     BUILDLINK_INCDIRS.pkg as above.
1.20      ben      3080:
1.1       grant    3081: The following variables are all optionally defined within this second section
                   3082: (protected against multiple inclusion) and control which package files are
                   3083: symlinked into ${BUILDLINK_DIR} and how their names are transformed during the
                   3084: symlinking:
                   3085:
                   3086:   * BUILDLINK_FILES.pkg (not shown above) is a shell glob pattern relative to $
                   3087:     {BUILDLINK_PREFIX.pkg} to be symlinked into ${BUILDLINK_DIR}, e.g. include/
                   3088:     *.h.
1.20      ben      3089:
1.1       grant    3090:   * BUILDLINK_FILES_CMD.pkg (not shown above) is a shell pipeline that outputs
                   3091:     to stdout a list of files relative to ${BUILDLINK_PREFIX.pkg}. The
                   3092:     resulting files are to be symlinked into ${BUILDLINK_DIR}. By default, this
                   3093:     takes the +CONTENTS of a pkg and filters it through $
                   3094:     {BUILDLINK_CONTENTS_FILTER.pkg}.
1.20      ben      3095:
1.1       grant    3096:   * BUILDLINK_CONTENTS_FILTER.pkg (not shown above) is a filter command that
                   3097:     filters +CONTENTS input into a list of files relative to $
                   3098:     {BUILDLINK_PREFIX.pkg} on stdout. By default for overwrite packages,
                   3099:     BUILDLINK_CONTENTS_FILTER.pkg outputs the contents of the include and lib
                   3100:     directories in the package +CONTENTS, and for pkgviews packages, it outputs
                   3101:     any libtool archives in lib directories.
1.20      ben      3102:
1.1       grant    3103:   * BUILDLINK_TRANSFORM.pkg (not shown above) is a list of sed arguments used
                   3104:     to transform the name of the source filename into a destination filename,
                   3105:     e.g. -e "s|/curses.h|/ncurses.h|g".
1.20      ben      3106:
1.1       grant    3107: The last section includes any buildlink3.mk needed for pkg's library
                   3108: dependencies. Including these buildlink3.mk files means that the headers and
                   3109: libraries for these dependencies are also symlinked into ${BUILDLINK_DIR}
                   3110: whenever the pkg buildlink3.mk file is included.
                   3111:
1.38      dillo    3112: 11.2.2. Updating BUILDLINK_DEPENDS. pkg in buildlink3.mk files
1.1       grant    3113:
                   3114: There are two situations that require increasing the dependency listed in
                   3115: BUILDLINK_DEPENDS.pkg after a package update:
                   3116:
                   3117:  1. if the sonames (major number of the library version) of any installed
1.47      reed     3118:     shared libraries change.
1.20      ben      3119:
1.1       grant    3120:  2. if the API or interface to the header files change.
1.20      ben      3121:
1.1       grant    3122: In these cases, BUILDLINK_DEPENDS.pkg should be adjusted to require at least
                   3123: the new package version. In some cases, the packages that depend on this new
                   3124: version may need their PKGREVISIONs increased and, if they have buildlink3.mk
1.45      wiz      3125: files, their BUILDLINK_DEPENDS.pkg adjusted, too. This is needed so that binary
                   3126: packages made using it will require the correct package dependency and not
                   3127: settle for an older one which will not contain the necessary shared libraries.
1.1       grant    3128:
                   3129: Please take careful consideration before adjusting BUILDLINK_DEPENDS.pkg as we
                   3130: don't want to cause unneeded package deletions and rebuilds. In many cases, new
                   3131: versions of packages work just fine with older dependencies. See Section
1.38      dillo    3132: 15.1.4, "Handling dependencies" for more information about dependencies on
1.36      wiz      3133: other packages, including the BUILDLINK_RECOMMENDED and RECOMMENDED
                   3134: definitions.
1.1       grant    3135:
1.38      dillo    3136: 11.3. Writing builtin.mk files
1.1       grant    3137:
                   3138: Some packages in pkgsrc install headers and libraries that coincide with
                   3139: headers and libraries present in the base system. Aside from a buildlink3.mk
                   3140: file, these packages should also include a builtin.mk file that includes the
                   3141: necessary checks to decide whether using the built-in software or the pkgsrc
                   3142: software is appropriate.
                   3143:
                   3144: The only requirements of a builtin.mk file for pkg are:
                   3145:
                   3146:  1. It should set USE_BUILTIN.pkg to either "yes" or "no" after it is included.
1.20      ben      3147:
1.1       grant    3148:  2. It should not override any USE_BUILTIN.pkg which is already set before the
                   3149:     builtin.mk file is included.
1.20      ben      3150:
1.1       grant    3151:  3. It should be written to allow multiple inclusion. This is very important
                   3152:     and takes careful attention to Makefile coding.
1.20      ben      3153:
1.38      dillo    3154: 11.3.1. Anatomy of a builtin.mk file
1.1       grant    3155:
                   3156: The following is the recommended template for builtin.mk files:
                   3157:
1.51    ! rillig   3158:     .if !defined(IS_BUILTIN.foo)
        !          3159:     #
        !          3160:     # IS_BUILTIN.foo is set to "yes" or "no" depending on whether "foo"
        !          3161:     # genuinely exists in the system or not.
        !          3162:     #
        !          3163:     IS_BUILTIN.foo?=        no
        !          3164:
        !          3165:     # BUILTIN_PKG.foo should be set here if "foo" is built-in and its package
        !          3166:     # version can be determined.
        !          3167:     #
        !          3168:     .  if !empty(IS_BUILTIN.foo:M[yY][eE][sS])
        !          3169:     BUILTIN_PKG.foo?=       foo-1.0
        !          3170:     .  endif
        !          3171:     .endif  # IS_BUILTIN.foo
        !          3172:
        !          3173:     .if !defined(USE_BUILTIN.foo)
        !          3174:     USE_BUILTIN.foo?=       ${IS_BUILTIN.foo}
        !          3175:     .  if defined(BUILTIN_PKG.foo)
        !          3176:     .    for _depend_ in ${BUILDLINK_DEPENDS.foo}
        !          3177:     .      if !empty(USE_BUILTIN.foo:M[yY][eE][sS])
        !          3178:     USE_BUILTIN.foo!=                                                       \
        !          3179:           if ${PKG_ADMIN} pmatch '${_depend_}' ${BUILTIN_PKG.foo}; then     \
        !          3180:                   ${ECHO} "yes";                                            \
        !          3181:           else                                                              \
        !          3182:                   ${ECHO} "no";                                             \
        !          3183:           fi
        !          3184:     .      endif
        !          3185:     .    endfor
        !          3186:     .  endif
        !          3187:     .endif  # USE_BUILTIN.foo
        !          3188:
        !          3189:     CHECK_BUILTIN.foo?=     no
        !          3190:     .if !empty(CHECK_BUILTIN.foo:M[nN][oO])
        !          3191:     #
        !          3192:     # Here we place code that depends on whether USE_BUILTIN.foo is set to
        !          3193:     # "yes" or "no".
        !          3194:     #
        !          3195:     .endif  # CHECK_BUILTIN.foo
1.1       grant    3196:
                   3197: The first section sets IS_BUILTIN.pkg depending on if pkg really exists in the
                   3198: base system. This should not be a base system software with similar
                   3199: functionality to pkg; it should only be "yes" if the actual package is included
                   3200: as part of the base system. This variable is only used internally within the
                   3201: builtin.mk file.
                   3202:
                   3203: The second section sets BUILTIN_PKG.pkg to the version of pkg in the base
                   3204: system if it exists (if IS_BUILTIN.pkg is "yes"). This variable is only used
                   3205: internally within the builtin.mk file.
                   3206:
                   3207: The third section sets USE_BUILTIN.pkg and is required in all builtin.mk files.
                   3208: The code in this section must make the determination whether the built-in
1.14      xtraeme  3209: software is adequate to satisfy the dependencies listed in BUILDLINK_DEPENDS.
                   3210: pkg. This is typically done by comparing BUILTIN_PKG.pkg against each of the
                   3211: dependencies in BUILDLINK_DEPENDS.pkg. USE_BUILTIN.pkg must be set to the
                   3212: correct value by the end of the builtin.mk file. Note that USE_BUILTIN.pkg may
                   3213: be "yes" even if IS_BUILTIN.pkg is "no" because we may make the determination
                   3214: that the built-in version of the software is similar enough to be used as a
                   3215: replacement.
1.1       grant    3216:
                   3217: The last section is guarded by CHECK_BUILTIN.pkg, and includes code that uses
                   3218: the value of USE_BUILTIN.pkg set in the previous section. This typically
                   3219: includes, e.g., adding additional dependency restrictions and listing
                   3220: additional files to symlink into ${BUILDLINK_DIR} (via BUILDLINK_FILES.pkg).
                   3221:
1.38      dillo    3222: 11.3.2. Global preferences for native or pkgsrc software
1.1       grant    3223:
                   3224: When building packages, it's possible to choose whether to set a global
                   3225: preference for using either the built-in (native) version or the pkgsrc version
                   3226: of software to satisfy a dependency. This is controlled by setting
                   3227: PREFER_PKGSRC and PREFER_NATIVE. These variables take values of either "yes",
                   3228: "no", or a list of packages. PREFER_PKGSRC tells pkgsrc to use the pkgsrc
                   3229: versions of software, while PREFER_NATIVE tells pkgsrc to use the built-in
                   3230: versions. Preferences are determined by the most specific instance of the
                   3231: package in either PREFER_PKGSRC or PREFER_NATIVE. If a package is specified in
                   3232: neither or in both variables, then PREFER_PKGSRC has precedence over
                   3233: PREFER_NATIVE. For example, to require using pkgsrc versions of software for
                   3234: all but the most basic bits on a NetBSD system, you can set:
                   3235:
1.51    ! rillig   3236:     PREFER_PKGSRC=  yes
        !          3237:     PREFER_NATIVE=  getopt skey tcp_wrappers
1.1       grant    3238:
                   3239: A package must have a builtin.mk file to be listed in PREFER_NATIVE, otherwise
                   3240: it is simply ignored in that list.
                   3241:
1.38      dillo    3242: Chapter 12. The pkginstall framework
1.35      jmmv     3243:
                   3244: Table of Contents
                   3245:
1.38      dillo    3246: 12.1. Files and directories outside the installation prefix
1.35      jmmv     3247:
1.38      dillo    3248:     12.1.1. Directory manipulation
                   3249:     12.1.2. File manipulation
1.35      jmmv     3250:
1.38      dillo    3251: 12.2. Configuration files
1.35      jmmv     3252:
1.38      dillo    3253:     12.2.1. How PKG_SYSCONFDIR is set
1.47      reed     3254:     12.2.2. Telling the software where configuration files are
1.38      dillo    3255:     12.2.3. Patching installations
                   3256:     12.2.4. Disabling handling of configuration files
1.35      jmmv     3257:
1.38      dillo    3258: 12.3. System startup scripts
1.35      jmmv     3259:
1.38      dillo    3260:     12.3.1. Disabling handling of system startup scripts
1.35      jmmv     3261:
1.38      dillo    3262: 12.4. System users and groups
                   3263: 12.5. System shells
1.35      jmmv     3264:
1.38      dillo    3265:     12.5.1. Disabling handling of configuration files
1.35      jmmv     3266:
                   3267: This chapter describes the framework known as pkginstall, whose key features
                   3268: are:
                   3269:
                   3270:   * Generic installation and manipulation of directories and files outside the
                   3271:     pkgsrc-handled tree, LOCALBASE.
                   3272:
                   3273:   * Automatic handling of configuration files during installation, provided
                   3274:     that packages are correctly designed.
                   3275:
                   3276:   * Generation and installation of system startup scripts.
                   3277:
                   3278:   * Registration of system users and groups.
                   3279:
                   3280:   * Registration of system shells.
                   3281:
1.47      reed     3282: The following sections inspect each of the above points in detail. Note that in
                   3283: order to use any of the described functionalities, you must add the following
                   3284: to your package's Makefile:
1.35      jmmv     3285:
1.51    ! rillig   3286:     USE_PKGINSTALL= YES
1.35      jmmv     3287:
                   3288: You may be thinking that many of the things described here could be easily done
                   3289: with simple code in the package's post-installation target (post-install). This
                   3290: is incorrect, as the code in them is only executed when building from source.
                   3291: Machines using binary packages could not benefit from it at all (as the code
                   3292: itself could be unavailable). Therefore, the only way to achieve any of the
                   3293: items described above is by means of the installation scripts, which are
                   3294: automatically generated by pkginstall.
                   3295:
1.38      dillo    3296: 12.1. Files and directories outside the installation prefix
1.35      jmmv     3297:
                   3298: As you already know, the PLIST file holds a list of files and directories that
                   3299: belong to a package. The names used in it are relative to the installation
                   3300: prefix (${PREFIX}), which means that it cannot register files outside this
                   3301: directory (absolute path names are not allowed). Despite this restriction, some
                   3302: packages need to install files outside this location; e.g., under ${VARBASE} or
                   3303: ${PKG_SYSCONFDIR}.
                   3304:
                   3305: The only way to achieve this is to create such files during installation time
                   3306: by using the installation scripts. These scripts can run arbitrary commands, so
1.47      reed     3307: they have the potential to create and manage files anywhere in the file system.
1.35      jmmv     3308: Here is where pkginstall comes into play: it provides generic scripts to
                   3309: abstract the manipulation of such files and directories based on variables set
1.47      reed     3310: in the package's Makefile. The rest of this section describes these variables.
1.35      jmmv     3311:
1.38      dillo    3312: 12.1.1. Directory manipulation
1.35      jmmv     3313:
                   3314: The following variables can be set to request the creation of directories
1.47      reed     3315: anywhere in the file system:
1.35      jmmv     3316:
                   3317:   * MAKE_DIRS and OWN_DIRS contain a list of directories that should be created
                   3318:     and should attempt to be destroyed by the installation scripts. The
                   3319:     difference between the two is that the latter prompts the administrator to
                   3320:     remove any directories that may be left after deinstallation (because they
                   3321:     were not empty), while the former does not.
                   3322:
                   3323:   * MAKE_DIRS_PERMS and OWN_DIRS_PERMS contain a list of tuples describing
                   3324:     which directories should be created and should attempt to be destroyed by
                   3325:     the installation scripts. Each tuple holds the following values, separated
                   3326:     by spaces: the directory name, its owner, its group and its numerical mode.
                   3327:     For example:
                   3328:
1.51    ! rillig   3329:         MAKE_DIRS_PERMS+=         ${VARBASE}/foo/private ${ROOT_USER} ${ROOT_GROUP} 0700
1.35      jmmv     3330:
                   3331:     The difference between the two is exactly the same as their non-PERMS
                   3332:     counterparts.
                   3333:
1.38      dillo    3334: 12.1.2. File manipulation
1.35      jmmv     3335:
                   3336: Creating non-empty files outside the installation prefix is tricky because the
                   3337: PLIST forces all files to be inside it. To overcome this problem, the only
                   3338: solution is to extract the file in the known place (i.e., inside the
                   3339: installation prefix) and copy it to the appropriate location during
                   3340: installation (done by the installation scripts generated by pkginstall). We
                   3341: will call the former the master file in the following paragraphs, which
                   3342: describe the variables that can be used to automatically and consistently
                   3343: handle files outside the installation prefix:
                   3344:
                   3345:   * CONF_FILES and SUPPORT_FILES are pairs of master and target files. During
                   3346:     installation time, the master file is copied to the target one if and only
                   3347:     if the latter does not exist. Upon deinstallation, the target file is
                   3348:     removed provided that it was not modified by the installation.
                   3349:
                   3350:     The difference between the two is that the latter prompts the administrator
                   3351:     to remove any files that may be left after deinstallation (because they
                   3352:     were not empty), while the former does not.
                   3353:
                   3354:   * CONF_FILES_PERMS and SUPPORT_FILES_PERMS contain tuples describing master
                   3355:     files as well as their target locations. For each of them, it also
                   3356:     specifies their owner, their group and their numeric permissions, in this
                   3357:     order. For example:
                   3358:
1.51    ! rillig   3359:         SUPPORT_FILES_PERMS+= ${PREFIX}/share/somefile ${VARBASE}/somefile ${ROOT_USER} ${ROOT_GROUP} 0700
1.35      jmmv     3360:
                   3361:     The difference between the two is exactly the same as their non-PERMS
                   3362:     counterparts.
                   3363:
1.38      dillo    3364: 12.2. Configuration files
1.35      jmmv     3365:
                   3366: Configuration files are special in the sense that they are installed in their
                   3367: own specific directory, PKG_SYSCONFDIR, and need special treatment during
                   3368: installation (most of which is automated by pkginstall). The main concept you
1.36      wiz      3369: must bear in mind is that files marked as configuration files are automatically
1.35      jmmv     3370: copied to the right place (somewhere inside PKG_SYSCONFDIR) during installation
                   3371: if and only if they didn't exist before. Similarly, they will not be removed if
1.36      wiz      3372: they have local modifications. This ensures that administrators never lose any
1.35      jmmv     3373: custom changes they may have made.
                   3374:
1.38      dillo    3375: 12.2.1. How PKG_SYSCONFDIR is set
1.35      jmmv     3376:
                   3377: As said before, the PKG_SYSCONFDIR variable specifies where configuration files
                   3378: shall be installed. Its contents are set based upon the following variables:
                   3379:
                   3380:   * PKG_SYSCONFBASE: The configuration's root directory. Defaults to ${PREFIX}/
1.36      wiz      3381:     etc although it may be overridden by the user to point to his preferred
1.35      jmmv     3382:     location (e.g., /etc, /etc/pkg, etc.). Packages must not use it directly.
                   3383:
                   3384:   * PKG_SYSCONFSUBDIR: A subdirectory of PKG_SYSCONFBASE under which the
                   3385:     configuration files for the package being built shall be installed. The
                   3386:     definition of this variable only makes sense in the package's Makefile
1.47      reed     3387:     (i.e., it is not user-customizable).
1.35      jmmv     3388:
                   3389:     As an example, consider the Apache package, www/apache2, which places its
                   3390:     configuration files under the httpd/ subdirectory of PKG_SYSCONFBASE. This
                   3391:     should be set in the package Makefile.
                   3392:
                   3393:   * PKG_SYSCONFVAR: Specifies the name of the variable that holds this
                   3394:     package's configuration directory (if different from PKG_SYSCONFBASE). It
                   3395:     defaults to PKGBASE's value, and is always prefixed with PKG_SYSCONFDIR.
                   3396:
                   3397:   * PKG_SYSCONFDIR.${PKG_SYSCONFVAR}: Holds the directory where the
                   3398:     configuration files for the package identified by PKG_SYSCONFVAR's shall be
                   3399:     placed.
                   3400:
                   3401: Based on the above variables, pkginstall determines the value of
                   3402: PKG_SYSCONFDIR, which is the only variable that can be used within a package to
                   3403: refer to its configuration directory. The algorithm used to set its value is
                   3404: basically the following:
                   3405:
                   3406:  1. If PKG_SYSCONFDIR.${PKG_SYSCONFVAR} is set, its value is used.
                   3407:
                   3408:  2. If the previous variable is not defined but PKG_SYSCONFSUBDIR is set in the
                   3409:     package's Makefile, the resulting value is ${PKG_SYSCONFBASE}/$
                   3410:     {PKG_SYSCONFSUBDIR}.
                   3411:
                   3412:  3. Otherwise, it is set to ${PKG_SYSCONFBASE}.
                   3413:
                   3414: It is worth mentioning that ${PKG_SYSCONFDIR} is automatically added to
1.38      dillo    3415: OWN_DIRS. See Section 12.1.1, "Directory manipulation" what this means.
1.35      jmmv     3416:
1.47      reed     3417: 12.2.2. Telling the software where configuration files are
1.35      jmmv     3418:
                   3419: Given that pkgsrc (and users!) expect configuration files to be in a known
1.36      wiz      3420: place, you need to teach each package where it shall install its files. In some
1.35      jmmv     3421: cases you will have to patch the package Makefiles to achieve it. If you are
                   3422: lucky, though, it may be as easy as passing an extra flag to the configuration
1.47      reed     3423: script; this is the case of GNU Autoconf- generated files:
1.35      jmmv     3424:
1.51    ! rillig   3425:     CONFIGURE_ARGS+= --sysconfdir=${PKG_SYSCONFDIR}
1.35      jmmv     3426:
                   3427: Note that this specifies where the package has to look for its configuration
                   3428: files, not where they will be originally installed (although the difference is
                   3429: never explicit, unfortunately).
                   3430:
1.38      dillo    3431: 12.2.3. Patching installations
1.35      jmmv     3432:
                   3433: As said before, pkginstall automatically handles configuration files. This
                   3434: means that the packages themselves must not touch the contents of $
1.36      wiz      3435: {PKG_SYSCONFDIR} directly. Bad news is that many software installation scripts
                   3436: will, out of the box, mess with the contents of that directory. So what is the
                   3437: correct procedure to fix this issue?
1.35      jmmv     3438:
                   3439: You must teach the package (usually by manually patching it) to install any
                   3440: configuration files under the examples hierarchy, share/examples/${PKGBASE}/.
                   3441: This way, the PLIST registers them and the administrator always has the
                   3442: original copies available.
                   3443:
                   3444: Once the required configuration files are in place (i.e., under the examples
                   3445: hierarchy), the pkginstall framework can use them as master copies during the
                   3446: package installation to update what is in ${PKG_SYSCONFDIR}. To achieve this,
                   3447: the variables CONF_FILES and CONF_FILES_PERMS are used. Check out Section
1.38      dillo    3448: 12.1.2, "File manipulation" for information about their syntax and their
1.35      jmmv     3449: purpose. Here is an example, taken from the mail/mutt package:
                   3450:
1.51    ! rillig   3451:     EGDIR=        ${PREFIX}/share/doc/mutt/samples
        !          3452:     CONF_FILES=   ${EGDIR}/Muttrc ${PKG_SYSCONFDIR}/Muttrc
1.35      jmmv     3453:
                   3454: Note that the EGDIR variable is specific to that package and has no meaning
                   3455: outside it.
                   3456:
1.38      dillo    3457: 12.2.4. Disabling handling of configuration files
1.35      jmmv     3458:
                   3459: The automatic copying of config files can be toggled by setting the environment
                   3460: variable PKG_CONFIG prior to package installation.
                   3461:
1.38      dillo    3462: 12.3. System startup scripts
1.35      jmmv     3463:
                   3464: System startup scripts are special files because they must be installed in a
                   3465: place known by the underlying OS, usually outside the installation prefix.
1.38      dillo    3466: Therefore, the same rules described in Section 12.1, "Files and directories
1.35      jmmv     3467: outside the installation prefix" apply, and the same solutions can be used.
1.36      wiz      3468: However, pkginstall provides a special mechanism to handle these files.
1.35      jmmv     3469:
                   3470: In order to provide system startup scripts, the package has to:
                   3471:
                   3472:  1. Store the script inside ${FILESDIR}, with the .sh suffix appended.
1.36      wiz      3473:     Considering the print/cups package as an example, it has a cupsd.sh in its
                   3474:     files directory.
1.35      jmmv     3475:
                   3476:  2. Tell pkginstall to handle it, appending the name of the script, without its
                   3477:     extension, to the RCD_SCRIPTS variable. Continuing the previous example:
                   3478:
1.51    ! rillig   3479:         RCD_SCRIPTS+=   cupsd
1.35      jmmv     3480:
                   3481:
                   3482: Once this is done, pkginstall will do the following steps for each script in an
                   3483: automated fashion:
                   3484:
                   3485:  1. Process the file found in the files directory applying all the
                   3486:     substitutions described in the FILES_SUBST variable.
                   3487:
                   3488:  2. Copy the script from the files directory to the examples hierarchy, $
1.36      wiz      3489:     {PREFIX}/share/examples/rc.d/. Note that this master file must be
                   3490:     explicitly registered in the PLIST.
1.35      jmmv     3491:
                   3492:  3. Add code to the installation scripts to copy the startup script from the
                   3493:     examples hierarchy into the system-wide startup scripts directory.
                   3494:
1.38      dillo    3495: 12.3.1. Disabling handling of system startup scripts
1.35      jmmv     3496:
                   3497: The automatic copying of config files can be toggled by setting the environment
                   3498: variable PKG_RCD_SCRIPTS prior to package installation. Note that the scripts
                   3499: will be always copied inside the examples hierarchy, ${PREFIX}/share/examples/
                   3500: rc.d/, no matter what the value of this variable is.
                   3501:
1.38      dillo    3502: 12.4. System users and groups
1.35      jmmv     3503:
                   3504: If a package needs to create special users and/or groups during installation,
                   3505: it can do so by using the pkginstall framework.
                   3506:
                   3507: Users can be created by adding entries to the PKG_USERS variable. Each entry
                   3508: has the following syntax, which mimics /etc/passwd:
                   3509:
1.51    ! rillig   3510:     user:group[:[userid][:[descr][:[home][:shell]]]]
1.35      jmmv     3511:
                   3512: Only the user and group are required; everything else is optional, but the
                   3513: colons must be in the right places when specifying optional bits. By default, a
                   3514: new user will have home directory /nonexistent, and login shell /sbin/nologin
                   3515: unless they are specified as part of the user element. Note that if the
1.51    ! rillig   3516: description contains spaces, then spaces should be backslash-escaped, as in:
1.35      jmmv     3517:
1.51    ! rillig   3518:     foo:foogrp::The\ Foomister
1.35      jmmv     3519:
                   3520: Similarly, groups can be created using the PKG_GROUPS variable, whose syntax
                   3521: is:
                   3522:
1.51    ! rillig   3523:     group[:groupid]
1.35      jmmv     3524:
                   3525: As before, only the group name is required; the numeric identifier is optional.
                   3526:
1.38      dillo    3527: 12.5. System shells
1.35      jmmv     3528:
                   3529: Packages that install system shells should register them in the shell database,
                   3530: /etc/shells, to make things easier to the administrator. This must be done from
                   3531: the installation scripts to keep binary packages working on any system.
                   3532: pkginstall provides an easy way to accomplish this task.
                   3533:
                   3534: When a package provides a shell interpreter, it has to set the PKG_SHELL
                   3535: variable to its absolute file name. This will add some hooks to the
                   3536: installation scripts to handle it. Consider the following example, taken from
                   3537: shells/zsh:
                   3538:
1.51    ! rillig   3539:     USE_PKGINSTALL= YES
        !          3540:     PKG_SHELL=      ${PREFIX}/bin/zsh
1.35      jmmv     3541:
1.38      dillo    3542: 12.5.1. Disabling handling of configuration files
1.35      jmmv     3543:
                   3544: The automatic registration of shell interpreters can be disabled by the
                   3545: administrator by setting the PKG_REGISTER_SHELLS environment variable to NO.
                   3546:
1.38      dillo    3547: Chapter 13. Options handling
1.1       grant    3548:
                   3549: Table of Contents
                   3550:
1.38      dillo    3551: 13.1. Global default options
                   3552: 13.2. Converting packages to use bsd.options.mk
1.48      dillo    3553: 13.3. Option Names
1.1       grant    3554:
                   3555: Many packages have the ability to be built to support different sets of
                   3556: features. bsd.options.mk is a framework in pkgsrc that provides generic
                   3557: handling of those options that determine different ways in which the packages
                   3558: can be built. It's possible for the user to specify exactly which sets of
                   3559: options will be built into a package or to allow a set of global default
                   3560: options apply.
                   3561:
1.38      dillo    3562: 13.1. Global default options
1.1       grant    3563:
                   3564: Global default options are listed in PKG_DEFAULT_OPTIONS, which is a list of
                   3565: the options that should be built into every package if that option is
                   3566: supported. This variable should be set in /etc/mk.conf.
                   3567:
1.38      dillo    3568: 13.2. Converting packages to use bsd.options.mk
1.1       grant    3569:
1.27      rillig   3570: The following example shows how bsd.options.mk should be used by the
                   3571: hypothetical ``wibble'' package, either in the package Makefile, or in a file,
                   3572: e.g. options.mk, that is included by the main package Makefile.
1.1       grant    3573:
1.51    ! rillig   3574:     PKG_OPTIONS_VAR=            PKG_OPTIONS.wibble
        !          3575:     PKG_SUPPORTED_OPTIONS=              wibble-foo ldap
        !          3576:     PKG_OPTIONS_OPTIONAL_GROUPS=        database
        !          3577:     PKG_OPTIONS_GROUP.database= mysql pgsql
        !          3578:     PKG_SUGGESTED_OPTIONS=              wibble-foo
        !          3579:     PKG_OPTIONS_LEGACY_VARS+=   WIBBLE_USE_OPENLDAP:ldap
        !          3580:     PKG_OPTIONS_LEGACY_OPTS+=   foo:wibble-foo
        !          3581:
        !          3582:     .include "../../mk/bsd.prefs.mk"
        !          3583:
        !          3584:     # this package was previously named wibble2
        !          3585:     .if defined(PKG_OPTIONS.wibble2)
        !          3586:     PKG_LEGACY_OPTIONS+=  ${PKG_OPTIONS.wibble2}
        !          3587:     PKG_OPTIONS_DEPRECATED_WARNINGS+= \
        !          3588:             "Deprecated variable PKG_OPTIONS.wibble2 used, use "${PKG_OPTIONS_VAR:Q}" instead."
        !          3589:     .endif
        !          3590:
        !          3591:     .include "../../mk/bsd.options.mk"
        !          3592:
        !          3593:     # Package-specific option-handling
        !          3594:
        !          3595:     ###
        !          3596:     ### FOO support
        !          3597:     ###
        !          3598:     .if !empty(PKG_OPTIONS:Mwibble-foo)
        !          3599:     CONFIGURE_ARGS+=    --enable-foo
        !          3600:     .endif
        !          3601:
        !          3602:     ###
        !          3603:     ### LDAP support
        !          3604:     ###
        !          3605:     .if !empty(PKG_OPTIONS:Mldap)
        !          3606:     .  include "../../databases/openldap/buildlink3.mk"
        !          3607:     CONFIGURE_ARGS+=    --enable-ldap=${BUILDLINK_PREFIX.openldap}
        !          3608:     .endif
        !          3609:
        !          3610:     ###
        !          3611:     ### database support
        !          3612:     ###
        !          3613:     .if !empty(PKG_OPTIONS:Mmysql)
        !          3614:     .  include "../../mk/mysql.buildlink3.mk"
        !          3615:     .endif
        !          3616:     .if !empty(PKG_OPTIONS:Mpgsql)
        !          3617:     .  include "../../mk/pgsql.buildlink3.mk"
        !          3618:     .endif
1.20      ben      3619:
1.28      rillig   3620: The first section contains the information about which build options are
1.1       grant    3621: supported by the package, and any default options settings if needed.
                   3622:
1.37      dillo    3623:  1. PKG_OPTIONS_VAR is the name of the make(1) variable that the user can set
1.38      dillo    3624:     to override the default options. It should be set to "PKG_OPTIONS.pkgbase".
1.20      ben      3625:
1.1       grant    3626:  2. PKG_SUPPORTED_OPTIONS is a list of build options supported by the package.
1.20      ben      3627:
1.37      dillo    3628:  3. PKG_OPTIONS_OPTIONAL_GROUPS is a list of names of groups of mutually
                   3629:     exclusive options. The options in each group are listed in
                   3630:     PKG_OPTIONS_GROUP.groupname. The most specific setting of any option from
                   3631:     the group takes precedence over all other options in the group. Options
                   3632:     from the groups will be automatically added to PKG_SUPPORTED_OPTIONS.
                   3633:
                   3634:  4. PKG_OPTIONS_REQUIRED_GROUPS is like PKG_OPTIONS_OPTIONAL_GROUPS, but
                   3635:     building the packages will fail if no option from the group is selected.
                   3636:
1.44      gdt      3637:  5. PKG_OPTIONS_NONEMPTY_SETS is a list of names of sets of options. At least
                   3638:     one option from each set must be selected. The options in each set are
                   3639:     listed in PKG_OPTIONS_SET.setname. Options from the sets will be
                   3640:     automatically added to PKG_SUPPORTED_OPTIONS. Building the package will
                   3641:     fail if no option from the set is selected.
                   3642:
                   3643:  6. PKG_SUGGESTED_OPTIONS is a list of build options which are enabled by
1.27      rillig   3644:     default.
                   3645:
1.44      gdt      3646:  7. PKG_OPTIONS_LEGACY_VARS is a list of "USE_VARIABLE: option" pairs that map
1.37      dillo    3647:     legacy /etc/mk.conf variables to their option counterparts. Pairs should be
                   3648:     added with "+=" to keep the listing of global legacy variables. A warning
                   3649:     will be issued if the user uses a legacy variable.
                   3650:
1.44      gdt      3651:  8. PKG_OPTIONS_LEGACY_OPTS is a list of "old-option: new-option" pairs that
1.37      dillo    3652:     map options that have been renamed to their new counterparts. Pairs should
                   3653:     be added with "+=" to keep the listing of global legacy options. A warning
                   3654:     will be issued if the user uses a legacy option.
                   3655:
1.44      gdt      3656:  9. PKG_LEGACY_OPTIONS is a list of options implied by deprecated variables
1.37      dillo    3657:     used. This can be used for cases that neither PKG_OPTIONS_LEGACY_VARS nor
                   3658:     PKG_OPTIONS_LEGACY_OPTS can handle, e. g. when PKG_OPTIONS_VAR is renamed.
                   3659:
1.44      gdt      3660: 10. PKG_OPTIONS_DEPRECATED_WARNINGS is a list of warnings about deprecated
1.37      dillo    3661:     variables or options used, and what to use instead.
                   3662:
                   3663: A package should never modify PKG_DEFAULT_OPTIONS or the variable named in
                   3664: PKG_OPTIONS_VAR. These are strictly user-settable. To suggest a default set of
                   3665: options, use PKG_SUGGESTED_OPTIONS.
                   3666:
1.42      dillo    3667: PKG_OPTIONS_VAR must be defined before including bsd.options.mk. If none of
                   3668: PKG_SUPPORTED_OPTIONS, PKG_OPTIONS_OPTIONAL_GROUPS, and
1.47      reed     3669: PKG_OPTIONS_REQUIRED_GROUPS are defined (as can happen with platform-specific
1.42      dillo    3670: options if none of them is supported on the current platform), PKG_OPTIONS is
                   3671: set to the empty list and the package is otherwise treated as not using the
                   3672: options framework.
1.28      rillig   3673:
                   3674: After the inclusion of bsd.options.mk, the variable PKG_OPTIONS contains the
1.37      dillo    3675: list of selected build options, properly filtered to remove unsupported and
1.28      rillig   3676: duplicate options.
1.20      ben      3677:
1.37      dillo    3678: The remaining sections contain the logic that is specific to each option. The
                   3679: correct way to check for an option is to check whether it is listed in
                   3680: PKG_OPTIONS:
                   3681:
1.51    ! rillig   3682:     .if !empty(PKG_OPTIONS:Moption)
1.37      dillo    3683:
1.48      dillo    3684: 13.3. Option Names
                   3685:
                   3686: Options that enable similar features in different packages (like optional
                   3687: support for a library) should use a common name in all packages that support it
                   3688: (like the name of the library). If another package already has an option with
                   3689: the same meaning, use the same name.
                   3690:
                   3691: Options that enable features specific to one package, where it's unlikely that
                   3692: another (unrelated) package has the same (or a similar) optional feature,
                   3693: should use a name prefixed with pkgname-.
                   3694:
                   3695: If a group of related packages share an optional feature specific to that
                   3696: group, prefix it with the name of the "main" package (e. g.
                   3697: djbware-errno-hack).
                   3698:
                   3699: For new options, add a line to mk/defaults/options.description. Lines have two
                   3700: fields, separated by tab. The first field is the option name, the second its
                   3701: description. The description should be a whole sentence (starting with an
                   3702: uppercase letter and ending with a period) that describes what enabling the
                   3703: option does. E. g. "Enable ispell support." The file is sorted by option names.
1.1       grant    3704:
1.38      dillo    3705: Chapter 14. The build process
1.1       grant    3706:
                   3707: Table of Contents
                   3708:
1.38      dillo    3709: 14.1. Program location
                   3710: 14.2. Main targets
                   3711: 14.3. Other helpful targets
1.1       grant    3712:
                   3713: The basic steps for building a program are always the same. First the program's
                   3714: source (distfile) must be brought to the local system and then extracted. After
                   3715: any patches to compile properly on NetBSD are applied, the software can be
                   3716: configured, then built (usually by compiling), and finally the generated
                   3717: binaries, etc. can be put into place on the system. These are exactly the steps
                   3718: performed by the NetBSD package system, which is implemented as a series of
                   3719: targets in a central Makefile, pkgsrc/mk/bsd.pkg.mk.
                   3720:
1.38      dillo    3721: 14.1. Program location
1.1       grant    3722:
                   3723: Before outlining the process performed by the NetBSD package system in the next
                   3724: section, here's a brief discussion on where programs are installed, and which
                   3725: variables influence this.
                   3726:
                   3727: The automatic variable PREFIX indicates where all files of the final program
                   3728: shall be installed. It is usually set to LOCALBASE (/usr/pkg), or CROSSBASE for
                   3729: pkgs in the "cross" category. The value of PREFIX needs to be put into the
                   3730: various places in the program's source where paths to these files are encoded.
1.38      dillo    3731: See Section 8.3, "patches/*" and Section 15.3.1, "Shared libraries - libtool"
1.1       grant    3732: for more details.
                   3733:
                   3734: When choosing which of these variables to use, follow the following rules:
                   3735:
                   3736:   * PREFIX always points to the location where the current pkg will be
                   3737:     installed. When referring to a pkg's own installation path, use "${PREFIX}
                   3738:     ".
1.20      ben      3739:
1.1       grant    3740:   * LOCALBASE is where all non-X11 pkgs are installed. If you need to construct
                   3741:     a -I or -L argument to the compiler to find includes and libraries
                   3742:     installed by another non-X11 pkg, use "${LOCALBASE}".
1.20      ben      3743:
1.1       grant    3744:   * X11BASE is where the actual X11 distribution (from xsrc, etc.) is
                   3745:     installed. When looking for standard X11 includes (not those installed by a
                   3746:     pkg), use "${X11BASE}".
1.20      ben      3747:
1.47      reed     3748:   * X11-based packages are special in that they may be installed in either
                   3749:     X11BASE or LOCALBASE.
1.20      ben      3750:
1.1       grant    3751:     Usually, X11 packages should be installed under LOCALBASE whenever
1.34      wiz      3752:     possible. Note that you will need to include ../../mk/x11.buildlink3.mk in
                   3753:     them to request the presence of X11 and to get the right compilation flags.
1.20      ben      3754:
1.1       grant    3755:     Even though, there are some packages that cannot be installed under
                   3756:     LOCALBASE: those that come with app-defaults files. These packages are
                   3757:     special and they must be placed under X11BASE. To accomplish this, set
                   3758:     either USE_X11BASE or USE_IMAKE in your package.
1.20      ben      3759:
1.34      wiz      3760:     Some notes: If you need to find includes or libraries installed by a pkg
                   3761:     that has USE_IMAKE or USE_X11BASE in its pkg Makefile, you need to look in
                   3762:     both ${X11BASE} and ${LOCALBASE}. To force installation of all X11 packages
                   3763:     in LOCALBASE, the pkgtools/xpkgwedge package is enabled by default.
1.20      ben      3764:
1.1       grant    3765:   * X11PREFIX should be used to refer to the installed location of an X11
                   3766:     package. X11PREFIX will be set to X11BASE if xpkgwedge is not installed,
                   3767:     and to LOCALBASE if xpkgwedge is installed.
1.20      ben      3768:
1.1       grant    3769:   * If xpkgwedge is installed, it is possible to have some packages installed
                   3770:     in X11BASE and some in LOCALBASE. To determine the prefix of an installed
                   3771:     package, the EVAL_PREFIX definition can be used. It takes pairs in the
                   3772:     format "DIRNAME=<package>", and the make(1) variable DIRNAME will be set to
                   3773:     the prefix of the installed package <package>, or "${X11PREFIX}" if the
                   3774:     package is not installed.
1.20      ben      3775:
1.1       grant    3776:     This is best illustrated by example.
1.20      ben      3777:
1.1       grant    3778:     The following lines are taken from pkgsrc/wm/scwm/Makefile:
1.20      ben      3779:
1.51    ! rillig   3780:         EVAL_PREFIX+=           GTKDIR=gtk+
        !          3781:         CONFIGURE_ARGS+=        --with-guile-prefix=${LOCALBASE}        \
        !          3782:                                 --with-gtk-prefix="${GTKDIR}"           \
        !          3783:                                 --enable-multibyte
1.20      ben      3784:
1.1       grant    3785:     Specific defaults can be defined for the packages evaluated using
                   3786:     EVAL_PREFIX, by using a definition of the form:
1.20      ben      3787:
1.51    ! rillig   3788:         GTKDIR_DEFAULT= ${LOCALBASE}
1.20      ben      3789:
1.1       grant    3790:     where GTKDIR corresponds to the first definition in the EVAL_PREFIX pair.
1.20      ben      3791:
1.1       grant    3792:   * Within ${PREFIX}, packages should install files according to hier(7), with
                   3793:     the exception that manual pages go into ${PREFIX}/man, not ${PREFIX}/share/
                   3794:     man.
1.20      ben      3795:
1.38      dillo    3796: 14.2. Main targets
1.1       grant    3797:
                   3798: The main targets used during the build process defined in bsd.pkg.mk are:
                   3799:
                   3800: fetch
1.20      ben      3801:
1.1       grant    3802:     This will check if the file(s) given in the variables DISTFILES and
                   3803:     PATCHFILES (as defined in the package's Makefile) are present on the local
                   3804:     system in /usr/pkgsrc/distfiles. If they are not present, an attempt will
                   3805:     be made to fetch them using commands of the form:
1.20      ben      3806:
1.51    ! rillig   3807:         ${FETCH_CMD} ${FETCH_BEFORE_ARGS} ${site}${file} ${FETCH_AFTER_ARGS}
1.20      ben      3808:
1.1       grant    3809:     where ${site} varies through several possibilities in turn: first,
                   3810:     MASTER_SITE_OVERRIDE is tried, then the sites specified in either
                   3811:     SITES_file if defined, else MASTER_SITES or PATCH_SITES, as applies, then
                   3812:     finally the value of MASTER_SITE_BACKUP. The order of all except the first
                   3813:     can be optionally sorted by the user, via setting either MASTER_SORT_AWK or
                   3814:     MASTER_SORT_REGEX.
1.20      ben      3815:
1.1       grant    3816: checksum
1.20      ben      3817:
1.1       grant    3818:     After the distfile(s) are fetched, their checksum is generated and compared
                   3819:     with the checksums stored in the distinfo file. If the checksums don't
                   3820:     match, the build is aborted. This is to ensure the same distfile is used
                   3821:     for building, and that the distfile wasn't changed, e.g. by some malign
                   3822:     force, deliberately changed distfiles on the master distribution site or
                   3823:     network lossage.
1.20      ben      3824:
1.1       grant    3825: extract
1.20      ben      3826:
1.1       grant    3827:     When the distfiles are present on the local system, they need to be
                   3828:     extracted, as they are usually in the form of some compressed archive
                   3829:     format, most commonly .tar.gz.
1.20      ben      3830:
1.1       grant    3831:     If only some of the distfiles need to be uncompressed, the files to be
                   3832:     uncompressed should be put into EXTRACT_ONLY.
1.20      ben      3833:
1.1       grant    3834:     If the distfiles are not in .tar.gz format, they can be extracted by
                   3835:     setting either EXTRACT_SUFX, or EXTRACT_CMD, EXTRACT_BEFORE_ARGS and
                   3836:     EXTRACT_AFTER_ARGS. In the former case, pkgsrc knows how to extract a
                   3837:     number of suffixes (.tar.gz, .tgz, .tar.gz2, .tbz, .tar.Z, .tar, .shar.gz,
                   3838:     .shar.bz2, .shar.Z, .shar, .Z, .bz2 and .gz; see the definition of the
1.47      reed     3839:     various DECOMPRESS_CMD variables in bsd.pkg.extract.mk for a complete
                   3840:     list). Here's an example on how to use the other variables for a program
                   3841:     that comes with a compressed shell archive whose name ends in .msg.gz:
1.20      ben      3842:
1.51    ! rillig   3843:         EXTRACT_SUFX=           .msg.gz
        !          3844:         EXTRACT_CMD=            zcat
        !          3845:         EXTRACT_BEFORE_ARGS=
        !          3846:         EXTRACT_AFTER_ARGS=     |sh
1.20      ben      3847:
1.1       grant    3848: patch
1.20      ben      3849:
1.1       grant    3850:     After extraction, all the patches named by the PATCHFILES, those present in
                   3851:     the patches subdirectory of the package as well as in $LOCALPATCHES/
                   3852:     $PKGPATH (e.g. /usr/local/patches/graphics/png) are applied. Patchfiles
                   3853:     ending in .Z or .gz are uncompressed before they are applied, files ending
                   3854:     in .orig or .rej are ignored. Any special options to patch(1) can be handed
1.38      dillo    3855:     in PATCH_DIST_ARGS. See Section 8.3, "patches/*" for more details.
1.20      ben      3856:
1.1       grant    3857:     By default patch(1) is given special args to make it fail if the patches
                   3858:     apply with some lines of fuzz. Please fix (regen) the patches so that they
                   3859:     apply cleanly. The rationale behind this is that patches that don't apply
                   3860:     cleanly may end up being applied in the wrong place, and cause severe harm
                   3861:     there.
1.20      ben      3862:
1.1       grant    3863: configure
1.20      ben      3864:
1.1       grant    3865:     Most pieces of software need information on the header files, system calls,
                   3866:     and library routines which are available in NetBSD. This is the process
                   3867:     known as configuration, and is usually automated. In most cases, a script
                   3868:     is supplied with the source, and its invocation results in generation of
                   3869:     header files, Makefiles, etc.
1.20      ben      3870:
1.1       grant    3871:     If the program's distfile contains its own configure script, this can be
                   3872:     invoked by setting HAS_CONFIGURE. If the configure script is a GNU autoconf
                   3873:     script, GNU_CONFIGURE should be specified instead. In either case, any
                   3874:     arguments to the configure script can be specified in the CONFIGURE_ARGS
                   3875:     variable, and the configure script's name can be set in CONFIGURE_SCRIPT if
1.20      ben      3876:     it differs from the default "configure". Here's an example from the
1.1       grant    3877:     sysutils/top package:
1.20      ben      3878:
1.51    ! rillig   3879:         HAS_CONFIGURE=          yes
        !          3880:         CONFIGURE_SCRIPT=       Configure
        !          3881:         CONFIGURE_ARGS+=        netbsd13
1.20      ben      3882:
1.1       grant    3883:     If the program uses an Imakefile for configuration, the appropriate steps
                   3884:     can be invoked by setting USE_IMAKE to "YES". (If you only want the package
                   3885:     installed in $X11PREFIX but xmkmf not being run, set USE_X11BASE instead!)
1.20      ben      3886:
1.1       grant    3887: build
1.20      ben      3888:
1.1       grant    3889:     Once configuration has taken place, the software will be built by invoking
1.10      wiz      3890:     $MAKE_PROGRAM on $MAKEFILE with $BUILD_TARGET as the target to build. The
1.29      rillig   3891:     default MAKE_PROGRAM is "gmake" if USE_TOOLS contains "gmake", "make"
1.10      wiz      3892:     otherwise. MAKEFILE is set to "Makefile" by default, and BUILD_TARGET
1.7       wiz      3893:     defaults to "all". Any of these variables can be set in the package's
                   3894:     Makefile to change the default build process.
1.20      ben      3895:
1.1       grant    3896: install
1.20      ben      3897:
1.1       grant    3898:     Once the build stage has completed, the final step is to install the
                   3899:     software in public directories, so users can access the programs and files.
                   3900:     As in the build-target, $MAKE_PROGRAM is invoked on $MAKEFILE here, but
                   3901:     with the $INSTALL_TARGET instead, the latter defaulting to "install" (plus
                   3902:     "install.man", if USE_IMAKE is set).
1.20      ben      3903:
1.1       grant    3904: If no target is specified, the default is "build". If a subsequent stage is
                   3905: requested, all prior stages are made: e.g. make build will also perform the
                   3906: equivalent of:
                   3907:
1.51    ! rillig   3908:     make fetch
        !          3909:     make checksum
        !          3910:     make extract
        !          3911:     make patch
        !          3912:     make configure
        !          3913:     make build
1.1       grant    3914:
1.38      dillo    3915: 14.3. Other helpful targets
1.1       grant    3916:
                   3917: pre/post-*
1.20      ben      3918:
1.1       grant    3919:     For any of the main targets described in the previous section, two
                   3920:     auxiliary targets exist with "pre-" and "post-" used as a prefix for the
                   3921:     main target's name. These targets are invoked before and after the main
                   3922:     target is called, allowing extra configuration or installation steps be
                   3923:     performed from a package's Makefile, for example, which a program's
                   3924:     configure script or install target omitted.
1.20      ben      3925:
1.1       grant    3926: do-*
1.20      ben      3927:
1.1       grant    3928:     Should one of the main targets do the wrong thing, and should there be no
                   3929:     variable to fix this, you can redefine it with the do-* target. (Note that
                   3930:     redefining the target itself instead of the do-* target is a bad idea, as
                   3931:     the pre-* and post-* targets won't be called anymore, etc.) You will not
                   3932:     usually need to do this.
1.20      ben      3933:
1.1       grant    3934: reinstall
1.20      ben      3935:
1.1       grant    3936:     If you did a make install and you noticed some file was not installed
                   3937:     properly, you can repeat the installation with this target, which will
                   3938:     ignore the "already installed" flag.
1.20      ben      3939:
1.1       grant    3940: deinstall
1.20      ben      3941:
1.1       grant    3942:     This target does a pkg_delete(1) in the current directory, effectively
                   3943:     de-installing the package. The following variables can be used to tune the
                   3944:     behaviour:
1.20      ben      3945:
1.1       grant    3946:     PKG_VERBOSE
1.20      ben      3947:
1.1       grant    3948:         Add a "-v" to the pkg_delete(1) command.
1.20      ben      3949:
1.1       grant    3950:     DEINSTALLDEPENDS
1.20      ben      3951:
1.1       grant    3952:         Remove all packages that require (depend on) the given package. This
                   3953:         can be used to remove any packages that may have been pulled in by a
                   3954:         given package, e.g. if make deinstall DEINSTALLDEPENDS=1 is done in
                   3955:         pkgsrc/x11/kde, this is likely to remove whole KDE. Works by adding
                   3956:         "-R" to the pkg_delete(1) command line.
1.20      ben      3957:
1.1       grant    3958: update
1.20      ben      3959:
1.1       grant    3960:     This target causes the current package to be updated to the latest version.
                   3961:     The package and all depending packages first get de-installed, then current
                   3962:     versions of the corresponding packages get compiled and installed. This is
                   3963:     similar to manually noting which packages are currently installed, then
                   3964:     performing a series of make deinstall and make install (or whatever
                   3965:     UPDATE_TARGET is set to) for these packages.
1.20      ben      3966:
1.1       grant    3967:     You can use the "update" target to resume package updating in case a
                   3968:     previous make update was interrupted for some reason. However, in this
                   3969:     case, make sure you don't call make clean or otherwise remove the list of
1.47      reed     3970:     dependent packages in WRKDIR. Otherwise, you lose the ability to
1.1       grant    3971:     automatically update the current package along with the dependent packages
                   3972:     you have installed.
1.20      ben      3973:
1.1       grant    3974:     Resuming an interrupted make update will only work as long as the package
                   3975:     tree remains unchanged. If the source code for one of the packages to be
                   3976:     updated has been changed, resuming make update will most certainly fail!
1.20      ben      3977:
1.1       grant    3978:     The following variables can be used either on the command line or in /etc/
                   3979:     mk.conf to alter the behaviour of make update:
1.20      ben      3980:
1.1       grant    3981:     UPDATE_TARGET
1.20      ben      3982:
1.1       grant    3983:         Install target to recursively use for the updated package and the
                   3984:         dependent packages. Defaults to DEPENDS_TARGET if set, "install"
                   3985:         otherwise for make update. e.g. make update UPDATE_TARGET=package
1.20      ben      3986:
1.1       grant    3987:     NOCLEAN
1.20      ben      3988:
1.1       grant    3989:         Don't clean up after updating. Useful if you want to leave the work
                   3990:         sources of the updated packages around for inspection or other
                   3991:         purposes. Be sure you eventually clean up the source tree (see the
                   3992:         "clean-update" target below) or you may run into troubles with old
                   3993:         source code still lying around on your next make or make update.
1.20      ben      3994:
1.1       grant    3995:     REINSTALL
1.20      ben      3996:
1.1       grant    3997:         Deinstall each package before installing (making DEPENDS_TARGET). This
                   3998:         may be necessary if the "clean-update" target (see below) was called
                   3999:         after interrupting a running make update.
1.20      ben      4000:
1.1       grant    4001:     DEPENDS_TARGET
1.20      ben      4002:
1.1       grant    4003:         Allows you to disable recursion and hardcode the target for packages.
                   4004:         The default is "update" for the update target, facilitating a recursive
                   4005:         update of prerequisite packages. Only set DEPENDS_TARGET if you want to
                   4006:         disable recursive updates. Use UPDATE_TARGET instead to just set a
                   4007:         specific target for each package to be installed during make update
                   4008:         (see above).
1.20      ben      4009:
1.1       grant    4010: clean-update
1.20      ben      4011:
1.1       grant    4012:     Clean the source tree for all packages that would get updated if make
                   4013:     update was called from the current directory. This target should not be
                   4014:     used if the current package (or any of its depending packages) have already
                   4015:     been de-installed (e.g., after calling make update) or you may lose some
1.20      ben      4016:     packages you intended to update. As a rule of thumb: only use this target
1.1       grant    4017:     before the first time you run make update and only if you have a dirty
                   4018:     package tree (e.g., if you used NOCLEAN).
1.20      ben      4019:
1.47      reed     4020:     If you are unsure about whether your tree is clean, you can either perform
                   4021:     a make clean at the top of the tree, or use the following sequence of
1.1       grant    4022:     commands from the directory of the package you want to update (before
                   4023:     running make update for the first time, otherwise you lose all the packages
                   4024:     you wanted to update!):
1.20      ben      4025:
1.1       grant    4026:     # make clean-update
                   4027:     # make clean CLEANDEPENDS=YES
                   4028:     # make update
1.20      ben      4029:
1.1       grant    4030:     The following variables can be used either on the command line or in /etc/
                   4031:     mk.conf to alter the behaviour of make clean-update:
1.20      ben      4032:
1.1       grant    4033:     CLEAR_DIRLIST
1.20      ben      4034:
1.1       grant    4035:         After make clean, do not reconstruct the list of directories to update
                   4036:         for this package. Only use this if make update successfully installed
                   4037:         all packages you wanted to update. Normally, this is done automatically
                   4038:         on make update, but may have been suppressed by the NOCLEAN variable
                   4039:         (see above).
1.20      ben      4040:
1.1       grant    4041: info
1.20      ben      4042:
1.1       grant    4043:     This target invokes pkg_info(1) for the current package. You can use this
                   4044:     to check which version of a package is installed.
1.20      ben      4045:
1.1       grant    4046: readme
1.20      ben      4047:
1.1       grant    4048:     This target generates a README.html file, which can be viewed using a
                   4049:     browser such as www/mozilla or www/links. The generated files contain
                   4050:     references to any packages which are in the PACKAGES directory on the local
                   4051:     host. The generated files can be made to refer to URLs based on
                   4052:     FTP_PKG_URL_HOST and FTP_PKG_URL_DIR. For example, if I wanted to generate
                   4053:     README.html files which pointed to binary packages on the local machine, in
                   4054:     the directory /usr/packages, set FTP_PKG_URL_HOST=file://localhost and
                   4055:     FTP_PKG_URL_DIR=/usr/packages. The ${PACKAGES} directory and its
                   4056:     subdirectories will be searched for all the binary packages.
1.20      ben      4057:
1.1       grant    4058: readme-all
1.20      ben      4059:
1.1       grant    4060:     Use this target to create a file README-all.html which contains a list of
                   4061:     all packages currently available in the NetBSD Packages Collection,
                   4062:     together with the category they belong to and a short description. This
                   4063:     file is compiled from the pkgsrc/*/README.html files, so be sure to run
                   4064:     this after a make readme.
1.20      ben      4065:
1.1       grant    4066: cdrom-readme
1.20      ben      4067:
1.1       grant    4068:     This is very much the same as the "readme" target (see above), but is to be
                   4069:     used when generating a pkgsrc tree to be written to a CD-ROM. This target
                   4070:     also produces README.html files, and can be made to refer to URLs based on
                   4071:     CDROM_PKG_URL_HOST and CDROM_PKG_URL_DIR.
1.20      ben      4072:
1.1       grant    4073: show-distfiles
1.20      ben      4074:
1.1       grant    4075:     This target shows which distfiles and patchfiles are needed to build the
                   4076:     package. (DISTFILES and PATCHFILES, but not patches/*)
1.20      ben      4077:
1.1       grant    4078: show-downlevel
1.20      ben      4079:
1.1       grant    4080:     This target shows nothing if the package is not installed. If a version of
                   4081:     this package is installed, but is not the version provided in this version
                   4082:     of pkgsrc, then a warning message is displayed. This target can be used to
                   4083:     show which of your installed packages are downlevel, and so the old
                   4084:     versions can be deleted, and the current ones added.
1.20      ben      4085:
1.1       grant    4086: show-pkgsrc-dir
1.20      ben      4087:
1.1       grant    4088:     This target shows the directory in the pkgsrc hierarchy from which the
                   4089:     package can be built and installed. This may not be the same directory as
                   4090:     the one from which the package was installed. This target is intended to be
                   4091:     used by people who may wish to upgrade many packages on a single host, and
                   4092:     can be invoked from the top-level pkgsrc Makefile by using the
                   4093:     "show-host-specific-pkgs" target.
1.20      ben      4094:
1.1       grant    4095: show-installed-depends
1.20      ben      4096:
1.1       grant    4097:     This target shows which installed packages match the current package's
                   4098:     DEPENDS. Useful if out of date dependencies are causing build problems.
1.20      ben      4099:
1.1       grant    4100: check-shlibs
1.20      ben      4101:
1.1       grant    4102:     After a package is installed, check all its binaries and (on ELF platforms)
                   4103:     shared libraries to see if they find the shared libs they need. Run by
                   4104:     default if PKG_DEVELOPER is set in /etc/mk.conf.
1.20      ben      4105:
1.1       grant    4106: print-PLIST
1.20      ben      4107:
1.1       grant    4108:     After a "make install" from a new or upgraded pkg, this prints out an
                   4109:     attempt to generate a new PLIST from a find -newer work/.extract_done. An
                   4110:     attempt is made to care for shared libs etc., but it is strongly
                   4111:     recommended to review the result before putting it into PLIST. On upgrades,
                   4112:     it's useful to diff the output of this command against an already existing
                   4113:     PLIST file.
1.20      ben      4114:
1.1       grant    4115:     If the package installs files via tar(1) or other methods that don't update
                   4116:     file access times, be sure to add these files manually to your PLIST, as
                   4117:     the "find -newer" command used by this target won't catch them!
1.20      ben      4118:
1.38      dillo    4119:     See Section 10.3, "Tweaking output of make print-PLIST" for more
                   4120:     information on this target.
1.20      ben      4121:
1.1       grant    4122: bulk-package
1.20      ben      4123:
1.1       grant    4124:     Used to do bulk builds. If an appropriate binary package already exists, no
                   4125:     action is taken. If not, this target will compile, install and package it
1.47      reed     4126:     (and its depends, if PKG_DEPENDS is set properly. See Section 6.3.1,
                   4127:     "Configuration"). After creating the binary package, the sources, the
                   4128:     just-installed package and its required packages are removed, preserving
1.1       grant    4129:     free disk space.
1.20      ben      4130:
1.1       grant    4131:     Beware that this target may deinstall all packages installed on a system!
1.20      ben      4132:
1.1       grant    4133: bulk-install
1.20      ben      4134:
1.47      reed     4135:     Used during bulk-installs to install required packages. If an up-to-date
1.20      ben      4136:     binary package is available, it will be installed via pkg_add(1). If not,
1.47      reed     4137:     make bulk-package will be executed, but the installed binary won't be
1.1       grant    4138:     removed.
1.20      ben      4139:
1.47      reed     4140:     A binary package is considered "up-to-date" to be installed via pkg_add(1)
1.1       grant    4141:     if:
1.20      ben      4142:
1.1       grant    4143:       * None of the package's files (Makefile, ...) were modified since it was
                   4144:         built.
1.20      ben      4145:
1.1       grant    4146:       * None of the package's required (binary) packages were modified since it
                   4147:         was built.
1.20      ben      4148:
1.1       grant    4149:     Beware that this target may deinstall all packages installed on a system!
1.20      ben      4150:
1.38      dillo    4151: Chapter 15. Notes on fixes for packages
1.1       grant    4152:
                   4153: Table of Contents
                   4154:
1.38      dillo    4155: 15.1. General operation
1.20      ben      4156:
1.38      dillo    4157:     15.1.1. How to pull in variables from /etc/mk.conf
                   4158:     15.1.2. Where to install documentation
                   4159:     15.1.3. Restricted packages
                   4160:     15.1.4. Handling dependencies
                   4161:     15.1.5. Handling conflicts with other packages
                   4162:     15.1.6. Packages that cannot or should not be built
                   4163:     15.1.7. Packages which should not be deleted, once installed
                   4164:     15.1.8. Handling packages with security problems
                   4165:     15.1.9. How to handle compiler bugs
                   4166:     15.1.10. How to handle incrementing versions when fixing an existing
1.31      wiz      4167:         package
1.38      dillo    4168:     15.1.11. Portability of packages
1.25      rillig   4169:
1.38      dillo    4170: 15.2. Possible downloading issues
1.25      rillig   4171:
1.38      dillo    4172:     15.2.1. Packages whose distfiles aren't available for plain downloading
                   4173:     15.2.2. How to handle modified distfiles with the 'old' name
1.25      rillig   4174:
1.38      dillo    4175: 15.3. Configuration gotchas
1.25      rillig   4176:
1.38      dillo    4177:     15.3.1. Shared libraries - libtool
                   4178:     15.3.2. Using libtool on GNU packages that already support libtool
                   4179:     15.3.3. GNU Autoconf/Automake
1.25      rillig   4180:
1.38      dillo    4181: 15.4. Building considerations
1.25      rillig   4182:
1.38      dillo    4183:     15.4.1. CPP defines
1.51    ! rillig   4184:     15.4.2. Getting a list of CPP defines
1.25      rillig   4185:
1.38      dillo    4186: 15.5. Package specific actions
1.25      rillig   4187:
1.38      dillo    4188:     15.5.1. User interaction
                   4189:     15.5.2. Handling licenses
                   4190:     15.5.3. Installing score files
                   4191:     15.5.4. Packages containing perl scripts
                   4192:     15.5.5. Packages with hardcoded paths to other interpreters
                   4193:     15.5.6. Packages installing perl modules
                   4194:     15.5.7. Packages installing info files
                   4195:     15.5.8. Packages installing GConf2 data files
                   4196:     15.5.9. Packages installing scrollkeeper data files
                   4197:     15.5.10. Packages installing X11 fonts
                   4198:     15.5.11. Packages installing GTK2 modules
                   4199:     15.5.12. Packages installing SGML or XML data
                   4200:     15.5.13. Packages installing extensions to the MIME database
                   4201:     15.5.14. Packages using intltool
                   4202:     15.5.15. Packages installing startup scripts
1.20      ben      4203:
1.38      dillo    4204: 15.6. Feedback to the author
1.1       grant    4205:
1.38      dillo    4206: 15.1. General operation
1.1       grant    4207:
1.38      dillo    4208: 15.1.1. How to pull in variables from /etc/mk.conf
1.1       grant    4209:
                   4210: The problem with package-defined variables that can be overridden via MAKECONF
                   4211: or /etc/mk.conf is that make(1) expands a variable as it is used, but evaluates
1.47      reed     4212: preprocessor-like statements (.if, .ifdef and .ifndef) as they are read. So, to
1.1       grant    4213: use any variable (which may be set in /etc/mk.conf) in one of the .if*
                   4214: statements, the file /etc/mk.conf must be included before that .if* statement.
                   4215:
1.47      reed     4216: Rather than having a number of ad-hoc ways of including /etc/mk.conf, should it
1.1       grant    4217: exist, or MAKECONF, should it exist, include the pkgsrc/mk/bsd.prefs.mk file in
                   4218: the package Makefile before any preprocessor-like .if, .ifdef, or .ifndef
                   4219: statements:
                   4220:
1.51    ! rillig   4221:     .include "../../mk/bsd.prefs.mk"
1.20      ben      4222:
1.1       grant    4223:     .if defined(USE_MENUS)
1.51    ! rillig   4224:     # ...
1.1       grant    4225:     .endif
                   4226:
1.47      reed     4227: If you wish to set the CFLAGS variable in /etc/mk.conf, please make sure to
                   4228: use:
1.1       grant    4229:
1.51    ! rillig   4230:     CFLAGS+=  -your -flags
1.1       grant    4231:
                   4232: Using CFLAGS= (i.e. without the "+") may lead to problems with packages that
                   4233: need to add their own flags. Also, you may want to take a look at the devel/
                   4234: cpuflags package if you're interested in optimization for the current CPU.
                   4235:
1.38      dillo    4236: 15.1.2. Where to install documentation
1.31      wiz      4237:
                   4238: Documentation should be installed into ${PREFIX}/share/doc/${PKGBASE} or $
                   4239: {PREFIX}/share/doc/${PKGNAME} (the latter includes the version number of the
                   4240: package).
                   4241:
1.38      dillo    4242: 15.1.3. Restricted packages
1.1       grant    4243:
                   4244: Some licenses restrict how software may be re-distributed. In order to satisfy
                   4245: these restrictions, the package system defines five make variables that can be
                   4246: set to note these restrictions:
                   4247:
                   4248:   * RESTRICTED
1.20      ben      4249:
1.1       grant    4250:     This variable should be set whenever a restriction exists (regardless of
                   4251:     its kind). Set this variable to a string containing the reason for the
                   4252:     restriction.
1.20      ben      4253:
1.1       grant    4254:   * NO_BIN_ON_CDROM
1.20      ben      4255:
1.1       grant    4256:     Binaries may not be placed on CD-ROM. Set this variable to ${RESTRICTED}
                   4257:     whenever a binary package may not be included on a CD-ROM.
1.20      ben      4258:
1.1       grant    4259:   * NO_BIN_ON_FTP
1.20      ben      4260:
1.1       grant    4261:     Binaries may not be placed on an FTP server. Set this variable to $
                   4262:     {RESTRICTED} whenever a binary package may not not be made available on the
                   4263:     Internet.
1.20      ben      4264:
1.1       grant    4265:   * NO_SRC_ON_CDROM
1.20      ben      4266:
1.1       grant    4267:     Distfiles may not be placed on CD-ROM. Set this variable to ${RESTRICTED}
                   4268:     if re-distribution of the source code or other distfile(s) is not allowed
                   4269:     on CD-ROMs.
1.20      ben      4270:
1.1       grant    4271:   * NO_SRC_ON_FTP
1.20      ben      4272:
1.1       grant    4273:     Distfiles may not be placed on FTP. Set this variable to ${RESTRICTED} if
                   4274:     re-distribution of the source code or other distfile(s) via the Internet is
                   4275:     not allowed.
1.20      ben      4276:
1.1       grant    4277: Please note that the use of NO_PACKAGE, IGNORE, NO_CDROM, or other generic make
                   4278: variables to denote restrictions is deprecated, because they unconditionally
                   4279: prevent users from generating binary packages!
                   4280:
1.38      dillo    4281: 15.1.4. Handling dependencies
1.1       grant    4282:
                   4283: Your package may depend on some other package being present - and there are
                   4284: various ways of expressing this dependency. pkgsrc supports the BUILD_DEPENDS
1.47      reed     4285: and DEPENDS definitions, the USE_TOOLS definition, as well as dependencies via
                   4286: buildlink3.mk, which is the preferred way to handle dependencies, and which
                   4287: uses the variables named above. See Chapter 11, Buildlink methodology for more
                   4288: information.
1.1       grant    4289:
                   4290: The basic difference between the two variables is as follows: The DEPENDS
                   4291: definition registers that pre-requisite in the binary package so it will be
                   4292: pulled in when the binary package is later installed, whilst the BUILD_DEPENDS
                   4293: definition does not, marking a dependency that is only needed for building the
                   4294: package.
                   4295:
                   4296: This means that if you only need a package present whilst you are building, it
                   4297: should be noted as a BUILD_DEPENDS.
                   4298:
                   4299: The format for a BUILD_DEPENDS and a DEPENDS definition is:
                   4300:
1.51    ! rillig   4301:     <pre-req-package-name>:../../<category>/<pre-req-package>
1.1       grant    4302:
                   4303: Please note that the "pre-req-package-name" may include any of the wildcard
1.18      xtraeme  4304: version numbers recognized by pkg_info(1).
1.1       grant    4305:
                   4306:  1. If your package needs another package's binaries or libraries to build or
                   4307:     run, and if that package has a buildlink3.mk file available, use it:
1.20      ben      4308:
1.1       grant    4309:         .include "../../graphics/jpeg/buildlink3.mk"
1.20      ben      4310:
1.1       grant    4311:  2. If your package needs to use another package to build itself and there is
                   4312:     no buildlink3.mk file available, use the BUILD_DEPENDS definition:
1.20      ben      4313:
1.51    ! rillig   4314:         BUILD_DEPENDS+= autoconf-2.13:../../devel/autoconf
1.20      ben      4315:
1.1       grant    4316:  3. If your package needs a library with which to link and again there is no
                   4317:     buildlink3.mk file available, this is specified using the DEPENDS
                   4318:     definition. An example of this is the print/lyx package, which uses the xpm
                   4319:     library, version 3.4j to build:
1.20      ben      4320:
1.51    ! rillig   4321:         DEPENDS+=       xpm-3.4j:../../graphics/xpm
1.20      ben      4322:
1.1       grant    4323:     You can also use wildcards in package dependences:
1.20      ben      4324:
1.51    ! rillig   4325:         DEPENDS+=       xpm-[0-9]*:../../graphics/xpm
1.20      ben      4326:
1.1       grant    4327:     Note that such wildcard dependencies are retained when creating binary
                   4328:     packages. The dependency is checked when installing the binary package and
                   4329:     any package which matches the pattern will be used. Wildcard dependencies
                   4330:     should be used with care.
1.20      ben      4331:
1.1       grant    4332:     The "-[0-9]*" should be used instead of "-*" to avoid potentially ambiguous
                   4333:     matches such as "tk-postgresql" matching a "tk-*" DEPENDS.
1.20      ben      4334:
1.1       grant    4335:     Wildcards can also be used to specify that a package will only build
                   4336:     against a certain minimum version of a pre-requisite:
1.20      ben      4337:
1.51    ! rillig   4338:         DEPENDS+=       tiff>=3.5.4:../../graphics/tiff
1.20      ben      4339:
1.1       grant    4340:     This means that the package will build against version 3.5.4 of the tiff
                   4341:     library or newer. Such a dependency may be warranted if, for example, the
                   4342:     API of the library has changed with version 3.5.4 and a package would not
                   4343:     compile against an earlier version of tiff.
1.20      ben      4344:
1.1       grant    4345:     Please note that such dependencies should only be updated if a package
                   4346:     requires a newer pre-requisite, but not to denote recommendations such as
                   4347:     security updates or ABI changes that do not prevent a package from building
                   4348:     correctly. Such recommendations can be expressed using RECOMMENDED:
1.20      ben      4349:
1.51    ! rillig   4350:         RECOMMENDED+=   tiff>=3.6.1:../../graphics/tiff
1.20      ben      4351:
1.1       grant    4352:     In addition to the above DEPENDS line, this denotes that while a package
                   4353:     will build against tiff>=3.5.4, at least version 3.6.1 is recommended.
                   4354:     RECOMMENDED entries will be turned into dependencies unless explicitly
1.36      wiz      4355:     ignored (in which case a warning will be printed).
                   4356:
                   4357:     To ignore these dependency recommendations and just use the required
                   4358:     DEPENDS, set IGNORE_RECOMMENDED=YES. This may make it easier and faster to
                   4359:     update packages built using pkgsrc, since older compatible dependencies can
                   4360:     continue to be used. This is useful for people who watch their rebuilds
                   4361:     very carefully; it is not very good as a general-purpose hammer. If you use
                   4362:     it, you need to be mindful of possible ABI changes, including those from
                   4363:     the underlying OS.
                   4364:
                   4365:     Packages that are built with recommendations ignored may not be uploaded to
                   4366:     ftp.NetBSD.org by developers and should not be used across different
                   4367:     systems that may have different versions of binary packages installed.
1.20      ben      4368:
1.1       grant    4369:     For security fixes, please update the package vulnerabilities file as well
1.38      dillo    4370:     as setting RECOMMENDED, see Section 15.1.8, "Handling packages with
1.1       grant    4371:     security problems" for more information.
1.20      ben      4372:
1.1       grant    4373:  4. If your package needs some executable to be able to run correctly and if
1.17      sketch   4374:     there's no buildlink3.mk file, this is specified using the DEPENDS
1.1       grant    4375:     variable. The print/lyx package needs to be able to execute the latex
                   4376:     binary from the teTeX package when it runs, and that is specified:
1.20      ben      4377:
1.51    ! rillig   4378:         DEPENDS+=        teTeX-[0-9]*:../../print/teTeX
1.20      ben      4379:
1.1       grant    4380:     The comment about wildcard dependencies from previous paragraph applies
                   4381:     here, too.
1.20      ben      4382:
1.1       grant    4383: If your package needs files from another package to build, see the first part
                   4384: of the "do-configure" target print/ghostscript5 package (it relies on the jpeg
                   4385: sources being present in source form during the build):
                   4386:
1.51    ! rillig   4387:     if [ ! -e ${_PKGSRCDIR}/graphics/jpeg/${WRKDIR:T}/jpeg-6b ]; then    \
        !          4388:         cd ${_PKGSRCDIR}/../../graphics/jpeg && ${MAKE} extract; \
1.1       grant    4389:     fi
                   4390:
                   4391: If you build any other packages that way, please make sure the working files
                   4392: are deleted too when this package's working files are cleaned up. The easiest
                   4393: way to do so is by adding a pre-clean target:
                   4394:
1.51    ! rillig   4395:     pre-clean:
        !          4396:             cd ${_PKGSRCDIR}/../../graphics/jpeg && ${MAKE} clean
1.1       grant    4397:
                   4398: Please also note the BUILD_USES_MSGFMT and BUILD_USES_GETTEXT_M4 definitions,
                   4399: which are provided as convenience definitions. The former works out whether
                   4400: msgfmt(1) is part of the base system, and, if it isn't, installs the devel/
                   4401: gettext package. The latter adds a build dependency on either an installed
                   4402: version of an older gettext package, or if it isn't, installs the devel/
                   4403: gettext-m4 package.
                   4404:
1.38      dillo    4405: 15.1.5. Handling conflicts with other packages
1.1       grant    4406:
                   4407: Your package may conflict with other packages a user might already have
                   4408: installed on his system, e.g. if your package installs the same set of files
                   4409: like another package in our pkgsrc tree.
                   4410:
1.47      reed     4411: In this case you can set CONFLICTS to a space-separated list of packages
1.1       grant    4412: (including version string) your package conflicts with.
                   4413:
1.47      reed     4414: For example, x11/Xaw3d and x11/Xaw-Xpm install the same shared library, thus
                   4415: you set in pkgsrc/x11/Xaw3d/Makefile:
1.1       grant    4416:
1.51    ! rillig   4417:     CONFLICTS=      Xaw-Xpm-[0-9]*
1.1       grant    4418:
                   4419: and in pkgsrc/x11/Xaw-Xpm/Makefile:
                   4420:
1.51    ! rillig   4421:     CONFLICTS=      Xaw3d-[0-9]*
1.1       grant    4422:
                   4423: Packages will automatically conflict with other packages with the name prefix
                   4424: and a different version string. "Xaw3d-1.5" e.g. will automatically conflict
                   4425: with the older version "Xaw3d-1.3".
                   4426:
1.38      dillo    4427: 15.1.6. Packages that cannot or should not be built
1.1       grant    4428:
                   4429: There are several reasons why a package might be instructed to not build under
                   4430: certain circumstances. If the package builds and runs on most platforms, the
                   4431: exceptions should be noted with NOT_FOR_PLATFORM. If the package builds and
1.45      wiz      4432: runs on a small handful of platforms, set ONLY_FOR_PLATFORM instead. Both
                   4433: ONLY_FOR_PLATFORM and NOT_FOR_PLATFORM are OS triples (OS-version-platform)
                   4434: that can use glob-style wildcards.
                   4435:
                   4436: If the package should be skipped (for example, because it provides
                   4437: functionality already provided by the system), set PKG_SKIP_REASON to a
                   4438: descriptive message. If the package should fail because some preconditions are
                   4439: not met, set PKG_FAIL_REASON to a descriptive message.
1.1       grant    4440:
1.38      dillo    4441: 15.1.7. Packages which should not be deleted, once installed
1.1       grant    4442:
                   4443: To ensure that a package may not be deleted, once it has been installed, the
                   4444: PKG_PRESERVE definition should be set in the package Makefile. This will be
                   4445: carried into any binary package that is made from this pkgsrc entry. A
                   4446: "preserved" package will not be deleted using pkg_delete(1) unless the "-f"
                   4447: option is used.
                   4448:
1.38      dillo    4449: 15.1.8. Handling packages with security problems
1.1       grant    4450:
                   4451: When a vulnerability is found, this should be noted in localsrc/security/
1.43      wiz      4452: advisories/pkg-vulnerabilities, and after committing that file, use make upload
                   4453: in the same directory to update the file on ftp.NetBSD.org.
                   4454:
                   4455: After fixing the vulnerability by a patch, its PKGREVISION should be increased
                   4456: (this is of course not necessary if the problem is fixed by using a newer
                   4457: release of the software). In addition, if a buildlink3.mk file exists for an
                   4458: affected package, a corresponding BUILDLINK_RECOMMENDED.pkg entry should be
                   4459: added or updated in it.
1.1       grant    4460:
                   4461: Also, if the fix should be applied to the stable pkgsrc branch, be sure to
                   4462: submit a pullup request!
                   4463:
1.43      wiz      4464: Binary packages already on ftp.NetBSD.org will be handled semi-automatically by
                   4465: a weekly cron job.
                   4466:
1.38      dillo    4467: 15.1.9. How to handle compiler bugs
1.1       grant    4468:
                   4469: Some source files trigger bugs in the compiler, based on combinations of
                   4470: compiler version and architecture and almost always relation to optimisation
                   4471: being enabled. Common symptoms are gcc internal errors or never finishing
                   4472: compiling a file.
                   4473:
1.47      reed     4474: Typically, a workaround involves testing the MACHINE_ARCH and compiler version,
1.1       grant    4475: disabling optimisation for that file/MACHINE_ARCH/compiler combination, and
                   4476: documenting it in pkgsrc/doc/HACKS. See that file for a number of examples!
                   4477:
1.38      dillo    4478: 15.1.10. How to handle incrementing versions when fixing an existing package
1.1       grant    4479:
                   4480: When making fixes to an existing package it can be useful to change the version
                   4481: number in PKGNAME. To avoid conflicting with future versions by the original
                   4482: author, a "nb1", "nb2", ... suffix can be used on package versions by setting
                   4483: PKGREVISION=1 (2, ...). The "nb" is treated like a "." by the pkg tools. e.g.
                   4484:
1.51    ! rillig   4485:     DISTNAME=       foo-17.42
        !          4486:     PKGREVISION=    9
1.1       grant    4487:
                   4488: will result in a PKGNAME of "foo-17.42nb9".
                   4489:
                   4490: When a new release of the package is released, the PKGREVISION should be
1.47      reed     4491: removed, e.g. on a new minor release of the above package, things should be
1.1       grant    4492: like:
                   4493:
1.51    ! rillig   4494:     DISTNAME=       foo-17.43
1.1       grant    4495:
1.38      dillo    4496: 15.1.11. Portability of packages
1.1       grant    4497:
                   4498: One appealing feature of pkgsrc is that it runs on many different platforms. As
                   4499: a result, it is important to ensure, where possible, that packages in pkgsrc
                   4500: are portable. There are some particular details you should pay attention to
                   4501: while working on pkgsrc.
                   4502:
1.38      dillo    4503: 15.1.11.1. ${INSTALL}, ${INSTALL_DATA_DIR}, ...
1.1       grant    4504:
                   4505: The BSD-compatible install supplied with some operating systems will not
                   4506: perform more than one operation at a time. As such, you should call "${INSTALL}
                   4507: ", etc. like this:
                   4508:
1.51    ! rillig   4509:     ${INSTALL_DATA_DIR} ${PREFIX}/dir1
        !          4510:     ${INSTALL_DATA_DIR} ${PREFIX}/dir2
1.1       grant    4511:
1.38      dillo    4512: 15.2. Possible downloading issues
1.1       grant    4513:
1.38      dillo    4514: 15.2.1. Packages whose distfiles aren't available for plain downloading
1.1       grant    4515:
                   4516: If you need to download from a dynamic URL you can set DYNAMIC_MASTER_SITES and
                   4517: a make fetch will call files/getsite.sh with the name of each file to download
                   4518: as an argument, expecting it to output the URL of the directory from which to
                   4519: download it. graphics/ns-cult3d is an example of this usage.
                   4520:
                   4521: If the download can't be automated, because the user must submit personal
                   4522: information to apply for a password, or must pay for the source, or whatever,
                   4523: you can set _FETCH_MESSAGE to a macro which displays a message explaining the
                   4524: situation. _FETCH_MESSAGE must be executable shell commands, not just a
                   4525: message. (Generally, it executes ${ECHO}). As of this writing, the following
1.43      wiz      4526: packages use this: cad/simian, devel/ipv6socket, emulators/vmware-module, fonts
                   4527: /acroread-jpnfont, multimedia/realplayer, sysutils/storage-manager, www/
1.1       grant    4528: ap-aolserver, www/openacs. Try to be consistent with them.
                   4529:
1.38      dillo    4530: 15.2.2. How to handle modified distfiles with the 'old' name
1.1       grant    4531:
                   4532: Sometimes authors of a software package make some modifications after the
                   4533: software was released, and they put up a new distfile without changing the
                   4534: package's version number. If a package is already in pkgsrc at that time, the
1.32      wiz      4535: checksum will no longer match. The contents of the new distfile should be
                   4536: compared against the old one before changing anything, to make sure the
1.1       grant    4537: distfile was really updated on purpose, and that no trojan horse or so crept
1.32      wiz      4538: in. Then, the correct way to work around this is to set DIST_SUBDIR to a unique
                   4539: directory name, usually based on PKGNAME_NOREV. In case this happens more
                   4540: often, PKGNAME can be used (thus including the nbX suffix) or a date stamp can
                   4541: be appended, like ${PKGNAME_NOREV}-YYYYMMDD. Do not forget regenerating the
                   4542: distinfo file after that, since it contains the DIST_SUBDIR path in the
                   4543: filenames. Furthermore, a mail to the package's authors seems appropriate
                   4544: telling them that changing distfiles after releases without changing the file
                   4545: names is not good practice.
1.1       grant    4546:
1.38      dillo    4547: 15.3. Configuration gotchas
1.1       grant    4548:
1.38      dillo    4549: 15.3.1. Shared libraries - libtool
1.1       grant    4550:
                   4551: pkgsrc supports many different machines, with different object formats like
                   4552: a.out and ELF, and varying abilities to do shared library and dynamic loading
                   4553: at all. To accompany this, varying commands and options have to be passed to
                   4554: the compiler, linker, etc. to get the Right Thing, which can be pretty annoying
1.20      ben      4555: especially if you don't have all the machines at your hand to test things. The
1.1       grant    4556: devel/libtool pkg can help here, as it just "knows" how to build both static
1.47      reed     4557: and dynamic libraries from a set of source files, thus being
                   4558: platform-independent.
1.1       grant    4559:
                   4560: Here's how to use libtool in a pkg in seven simple steps:
                   4561:
                   4562:  1. Add USE_LIBTOOL=yes to the package Makefile.
1.20      ben      4563:
1.1       grant    4564:  2. For library objects, use "${LIBTOOL} --mode=compile ${CC}" in place of "$
                   4565:     {CC}". You could even add it to the definition of CC, if only libraries are
                   4566:     being built in a given Makefile. This one command will build both PIC and
                   4567:     non-PIC library objects, so you need not have separate shared and
                   4568:     non-shared library rules.
1.20      ben      4569:
1.1       grant    4570:  3. For the linking of the library, remove any "ar", "ranlib", and "ld
                   4571:     -Bshareable" commands, and instead use:
1.20      ben      4572:
1.51    ! rillig   4573:         ${LIBTOOL} --mode=link ${CC} -o ${.TARGET:.a=.la} ${OBJS:.o=.lo} \
        !          4574:             -rpath ${PREFIX}/lib -version-info major:minor
1.20      ben      4575:
1.1       grant    4576:     Note that the library is changed to have a .la extension, and the objects
                   4577:     are changed to have a .lo extension. Change OBJS as necessary. This
                   4578:     automatically creates all of the .a, .so.major.minor, and ELF symlinks (if
                   4579:     necessary) in the build directory. Be sure to include "-version-info",
                   4580:     especially when major and minor are zero, as libtool will otherwise strip
                   4581:     off the shared library version.
1.20      ben      4582:
1.1       grant    4583:     From the libtool manual:
1.20      ben      4584:
1.51    ! rillig   4585:         So, libtool library versions are described by three integers:
1.20      ben      4586:
1.51    ! rillig   4587:         CURRENT
        !          4588:             The most recent interface number that this library implements.
1.20      ben      4589:
1.51    ! rillig   4590:         REVISION
        !          4591:             The implementation number of the CURRENT interface.
1.20      ben      4592:
1.51    ! rillig   4593:         AGE
        !          4594:             The difference between the newest and oldest interfaces that
        !          4595:             this library implements.  In other words, the library implements
        !          4596:             all the interface numbers in the range from number `CURRENT -
        !          4597:             AGE' to `CURRENT'.
1.20      ben      4598:
1.51    ! rillig   4599:         If two libraries have identical CURRENT and AGE numbers, then the
        !          4600:         dynamic linker chooses the library with the greater REVISION number.
1.20      ben      4601:
1.1       grant    4602:     The "-release" option will produce different results for a.out and ELF
                   4603:     (excluding symlinks) in only one case. An ELF library of the form
                   4604:     "libfoo-release.so.x.y" will have a symlink of "libfoo.so.x.y" on an a.out
                   4605:     platform. This is handled automatically.
1.20      ben      4606:
1.1       grant    4607:     The "-rpath argument" is the install directory of the library being built.
1.20      ben      4608:
1.19      hubertf  4609:     In the PLIST, include only the .la file, the other files will be added
                   4610:     automatically.
1.20      ben      4611:
1.1       grant    4612:  4. When linking shared object (.so) files, i.e. files that are loaded via
                   4613:     dlopen(3), NOT shared libraries, use "-module -avoid-version" to prevent
                   4614:     them getting version tacked on.
1.20      ben      4615:
1.1       grant    4616:     The PLIST file gets the foo.so entry.
1.20      ben      4617:
1.1       grant    4618:  5. When linking programs that depend on these libraries before they are
                   4619:     installed, preface the cc(1) or ld(1) line with "${LIBTOOL} --mode=link",
                   4620:     and it will find the correct libraries (static or shared), but please be
                   4621:     aware that libtool will not allow you to specify a relative path in -L
                   4622:     (such as "-L../somelib"), because it expects you to change that argument to
                   4623:     be the .la file. e.g.
1.20      ben      4624:
1.51    ! rillig   4625:         ${LIBTOOL} --mode=link ${CC} -o someprog -L../somelib -lsomelib
1.20      ben      4626:
1.1       grant    4627:     should be changed to:
1.20      ben      4628:
1.51    ! rillig   4629:         ${LIBTOOL} --mode=link ${CC} -o someprog ../somelib/somelib.la
1.20      ben      4630:
1.1       grant    4631:     and it will do the right thing with the libraries.
1.20      ben      4632:
1.1       grant    4633:  6. When installing libraries, preface the install(1) or cp(1) command with "$
                   4634:     {LIBTOOL} --mode=install", and change the library name to .la. e.g.
1.20      ben      4635:
1.51    ! rillig   4636:         ${LIBTOOL} --mode=install ${BSD_INSTALL_DATA} ${SOMELIB:.a=.la} ${PREFIX}/lib
1.20      ben      4637:
1.1       grant    4638:     This will install the static .a, shared library, any needed symlinks, and
                   4639:     run ldconfig(8).
1.20      ben      4640:
1.23      wiz      4641:  7. In your PLIST, include only the .la file (this is a change from previous
                   4642:     behaviour).
1.20      ben      4643:
1.38      dillo    4644: 15.3.2. Using libtool on GNU packages that already support libtool
1.1       grant    4645:
                   4646: Add USE_LIBTOOL=yes to the package Makefile. This will override the package's
                   4647: own libtool in most cases. For older libtool using packages, libtool is made by
                   4648: ltconfig script during the do-configure step; you can check the libtool script
                   4649: location by doing make configure; find work*/ -name libtool.
                   4650:
                   4651: LIBTOOL_OVERRIDE specifies which libtool scripts, relative to WRKSRC, to
                   4652: override. By default, it is set to "libtool */libtool */*/libtool". If this
                   4653: does not match the location of the package's libtool script(s), set it as
                   4654: appropriate.
                   4655:
                   4656: If you do not need *.a static libraries built and installed, then use
                   4657: SHLIBTOOL_OVERRIDE instead.
                   4658:
1.47      reed     4659: If your package makes use of the platform-independent library for loading
1.1       grant    4660: dynamic shared objects, that comes with libtool (libltdl), you should include
1.22      tv       4661: devel/libltdl/buildlink3.mk.
1.1       grant    4662:
                   4663: Some packages use libtool incorrectly so that the package may not work or build
                   4664: in some circumstances. Some of the more common errors are:
                   4665:
                   4666:   * The inclusion of a shared object (-module) as a dependent library in an
                   4667:     executable or library. This in itself isn't a problem if one of two things
                   4668:     has been done:
1.20      ben      4669:
1.1       grant    4670:      1. The shared object is named correctly, i.e. libfoo.la, not foo.la
1.20      ben      4671:
1.1       grant    4672:      2. The -dlopen option is used when linking an executable.
1.20      ben      4673:
1.1       grant    4674:   * The use of libltdl without the correct calls to initialisation routines.
                   4675:     The function lt_dlinit() should be called and the macro
                   4676:     LTDL_SET_PRELOADED_SYMBOLS included in executables.
1.20      ben      4677:
1.38      dillo    4678: 15.3.3. GNU Autoconf/Automake
1.1       grant    4679:
                   4680: If a package needs GNU autoconf or automake to be executed to regenerate the
                   4681: configure script and Makefile.in makefile templates, then they should be
1.35      jmmv     4682: executed in a pre-configure target.
1.1       grant    4683:
                   4684: For packages that need only autoconf:
                   4685:
1.51    ! rillig   4686:     AUTOCONF_REQD=  2.50            # if default version is not good enough
        !          4687:     USE_TOOLS+=     autoconf        # use "autoconf213" for autoconf-2.13
        !          4688:     ...
1.1       grant    4689:
1.51    ! rillig   4690:     pre-configure:
        !          4691:             cd ${WRKSRC}; autoconf
1.1       grant    4692:
1.51    ! rillig   4693:     ...
1.1       grant    4694:
                   4695: and for packages that need automake and autoconf:
                   4696:
1.51    ! rillig   4697:     AUTOMAKE_REQD=  1.7.1           # if default version is not good enough
        !          4698:     USE_TOOLS+=     automake        # use "automake14" for automake-1.4
        !          4699:     ...
1.1       grant    4700:
1.51    ! rillig   4701:     pre-configure:
        !          4702:             cd ${WRKSRC};                          \
        !          4703:             aclocal; autoheader;                   \
        !          4704:             automake -a --foreign -i; autoconf
        !          4705:
        !          4706:     ...
1.1       grant    4707:
1.35      jmmv     4708: Packages which use GNU Automake will almost certainly require GNU Make.
1.1       grant    4709:
                   4710: There are times when the configure process makes additional changes to the
                   4711: generated files, which then causes the build process to try to re-execute the
                   4712: automake sequence. This is prevented by touching various files in the configure
                   4713: stage. If this causes problems with your package you can set AUTOMAKE_OVERRIDE=
                   4714: NO in the package Makefile.
                   4715:
1.38      dillo    4716: 15.4. Building considerations
1.1       grant    4717:
1.38      dillo    4718: 15.4.1. CPP defines
1.1       grant    4719:
                   4720: To port an application to NetBSD, it's usually necessary for the compiler to be
                   4721: able to judge the system on which it's compiling, and we use definitions so
                   4722: that the C pre-processor can do this.
                   4723:
                   4724: To test whether you are working on a 4.4 BSD-derived system, you should use the
                   4725: BSD definition, which is defined in <sys/param.h> on said systems.
                   4726:
1.51    ! rillig   4727:     #include <sys/param.h>
1.1       grant    4728:
                   4729: and then you can surround the BSD-specific parts of your package's C/C++ code
                   4730: using this conditional:
                   4731:
1.51    ! rillig   4732:     #if (defined(BSD) && BSD >= 199306)
1.1       grant    4733:     ...
1.51    ! rillig   4734:     #endif
1.1       grant    4735:
                   4736: Please use the "__NetBSD__" definition sparingly - it should only apply to
1.47      reed     4737: features of NetBSD that are not present in other 4.4-lite-derived BSDs.
1.1       grant    4738:
1.51    ! rillig   4739: 15.4.2. Getting a list of CPP defines
        !          4740:
        !          4741: When your system uses the GNU C Compiler, you can get a list of symbols that
        !          4742: are defined by default, e.g. to identify the platform, with the following
        !          4743: command:
        !          4744:
        !          4745:     gcc -E -dM - < /dev/null
        !          4746:
1.38      dillo    4747: 15.5. Package specific actions
1.1       grant    4748:
1.38      dillo    4749: 15.5.1. User interaction
1.1       grant    4750:
                   4751: Occasionally, packages require interaction from the user, and this can be in a
                   4752: number of ways:
                   4753:
                   4754:   * help in fetching the distfiles
1.20      ben      4755:
1.1       grant    4756:   * help to configure the package before it is built
1.20      ben      4757:
1.1       grant    4758:   * help during the build process
1.20      ben      4759:
1.1       grant    4760:   * help during the installation of a package
1.20      ben      4761:
1.1       grant    4762: The INTERACTIVE_STAGE definition is provided to notify the pkgsrc mechanism of
                   4763: an interactive stage which will be needed, and this should be set in the
1.47      reed     4764: package's Makefile, e.g.:
1.1       grant    4765:
1.51    ! rillig   4766:     INTERACTIVE_STAGE=      build
1.1       grant    4767:
                   4768: Multiple interactive stages can be specified:
                   4769:
1.51    ! rillig   4770:     INTERACTIVE_STAGE=      configure install
1.1       grant    4771:
1.38      dillo    4772: 15.5.2. Handling licenses
1.1       grant    4773:
1.44      gdt      4774: A package may be covered by a license which the user has or has not agreed to
                   4775: accept. For these cases, pkgsrc contains a mechanism to note that a package is
                   4776: covered by a particular license, and the package cannot be built unless the
                   4777: user has accepted the license. (Installation of binary packages are not
                   4778: currently subject to this mechanism.) Packages with licenses that are either
                   4779: Open Source according to the Open Source Initiative or Free according to the
                   4780: Free Software Foundation will not be marked with a license tag. Packages with
                   4781: licenses that have not been determined to meet either definition will be marked
                   4782: with a license tag referring to the license. This will prevent building unless
                   4783: pkgsrc is informed that the license is acceptable, and enables displaying the
                   4784: license.
                   4785:
                   4786: The license tag mechanism is intended to address copyright-related issues
                   4787: surrounding building, installing and using a package, and not to address
                   4788: redistribution issues (see RESTRICTED and NO_SRC_ON_FTP, etc.). However, the
                   4789: above definition of licenses for which tags are not needed implies that
                   4790: packages with redistribution restrictions should have tags.
                   4791:
                   4792: Denoting that a package is covered by a particular license is done by placing
                   4793: the license in pkgsrc/licenses and setting the LICENSE variable to a string
                   4794: identifying the license, e.g. in graphics/xv:
1.1       grant    4795:
1.51    ! rillig   4796:     LICENSE=        xv-license
1.1       grant    4797:
1.44      gdt      4798: When trying to build, the user will get a notice that the package is covered by
                   4799: a license which has not been accepted:
1.1       grant    4800:
1.51    ! rillig   4801:     % make
        !          4802:     ===> xv-3.10anb9 has an unacceptable license: xv-license.
        !          4803:     ===>     To view the license, enter "/usr/bin/make show-license".
        !          4804:     ===>     To indicate acceptance, add this line to your /etc/mk.conf:
        !          4805:     ===>     ACCEPTABLE_LICENSES+=xv-license
        !          4806:     *** Error code 1
1.1       grant    4807:
                   4808: The license can be viewed with make show-license, and if it is considered
                   4809: appropriate, the line printed above can be added to /etc/mk.conf to indicate
                   4810: acceptance of the particular license:
                   4811:
1.51    ! rillig   4812:     ACCEPTABLE_LICENSES+=xv-license
1.1       grant    4813:
                   4814: When adding a package with a new license, the license text should be added to
                   4815: pkgsrc/licenses for displaying. A list of known licenses can be seen in this
                   4816: directory as well as by looking at the list of (commented out)
1.11      ben      4817: ACCEPTABLE_LICENSES variable settings in pkgsrc/mk/defaults/mk.conf.
1.1       grant    4818:
1.44      gdt      4819: The use of LICENSE=shareware, LICENSE=no-commercial-use, and similar language
                   4820: is deprecated because it does not crisply refer to a particular license text.
                   4821: Another problem with such usage is that it does not enable a user to denote
                   4822: acceptance of the license for a single package without accepting the same
                   4823: license text for another package. In particular, this can be inappropriate when
                   4824: e.g. one accepts a particular license to indicate to pkgsrc that a fee has been
                   4825: paid.
1.1       grant    4826:
1.38      dillo    4827: 15.5.3. Installing score files
1.1       grant    4828:
                   4829: Certain packages, most of them in the games category, install a score file that
                   4830: allows all users on the system to record their highscores. In order for this to
                   4831: work, the binaries need to be installed setgid and the score files owned by the
                   4832: appropriate group and/or owner (traditionally the "games" user/group). The
1.11      ben      4833: following variables, documented in more detail in mk/defaults/mk.conf, control
                   4834: this behaviour: SETGIDGAME, GAMEDATAMODE, GAMEGRP, GAMEMODE, GAMEOWN.
1.1       grant    4835:
                   4836: Note that per default, setgid installation of games is disabled; setting
                   4837: SETGIDGAME=YES will set all the other variables accordingly.
                   4838:
                   4839: A package should therefor never hard code file ownership or access permissions
                   4840: but rely on INSTALL_GAME and INSTALL_GAME_DATA to set these correctly.
                   4841:
1.38      dillo    4842: 15.5.4. Packages containing perl scripts
1.1       grant    4843:
                   4844: If your package contains interpreted perl scripts, set REPLACE_PERL to ensure
                   4845: that the proper interpreter path is set. REPLACE_PERL should contain a list of
                   4846: scripts, relative to WRKSRC, that you want adjusted.
                   4847:
1.38      dillo    4848: 15.5.5. Packages with hardcoded paths to other interpreters
1.1       grant    4849:
                   4850: Your package may also contain scripts with hardcoded paths to other
                   4851: interpreters besides (or as well as) perl. To correct the full pathname to the
                   4852: script interpreter, you need to set the following definitions in your Makefile
                   4853: (we shall use tclsh in this example):
                   4854:
1.51    ! rillig   4855:     REPLACE_INTERPRETER+=   tcl
        !          4856:     _REPLACE.tcl.old=       .*/bin/tclsh
        !          4857:     _REPLACE.tcl.new=       ${PREFIX}/bin/tclsh
        !          4858:     _REPLACE_FILES.tcl=     # list of tcl scripts which need to be fixed,
        !          4859:                             # relative to ${WRKSRC}, just as in REPLACE_PERL
1.1       grant    4860:
1.38      dillo    4861: 15.5.6. Packages installing perl modules
1.1       grant    4862:
                   4863: Makefiles of packages providing perl5 modules should include the Makefile
                   4864: fragment ../../lang/perl5/module.mk. It provides a do-configure target for the
                   4865: standard perl configuration for such modules as well as various hooks to tune
                   4866: this configuration. See comments in this file for details.
                   4867:
                   4868: Perl5 modules will install into different places depending on the version of
                   4869: perl used during the build process. To address this, pkgsrc will append lines
                   4870: to the PLIST corresponding to the files listed in the installed .packlist file
                   4871: generated by most perl5 modules. This is invoked by defining PERL5_PACKLIST to
                   4872: a space-separated list of paths to packlist files, e.g.:
                   4873:
1.51    ! rillig   4874:     PERL5_PACKLIST= ${PERL5_SITEARCH}/auto/Pg/.packlist
1.1       grant    4875:
                   4876: The variables PERL5_SITELIB, PERL5_SITEARCH, and PERL5_ARCHLIB represent the
                   4877: three locations in which perl5 modules may be installed, and may be used by
                   4878: perl5 packages that don't have a packlist. These three variables are also
                   4879: substituted for in the PLIST.
                   4880:
1.38      dillo    4881: 15.5.7. Packages installing info files
1.1       grant    4882:
                   4883: Some packages install info files or use the "makeinfo" or "install-info"
                   4884: commands. Each of the info files:
                   4885:
                   4886:   * is considered to be installed in the directory ${PREFIX}/${INFO_DIR},
1.20      ben      4887:
1.1       grant    4888:   * is registered in the Info directory file ${PREFIX}/${INFO_DIR}/dir,
1.20      ben      4889:
1.1       grant    4890:   * and must be listed as a filename in the INFO_FILES variable in the package
                   4891:     Makefile.
1.20      ben      4892:
1.1       grant    4893: INFO_DIR defaults to "info" and can be overridden in the package Makefile.
                   4894: INSTALL and DEINSTALL scripts will be generated to handle registration of the
                   4895: info files in the Info directory file. The "install-info" command used for the
                   4896: info files registration is either provided by the system, or by a special
                   4897: purpose package automatically added as dependency if needed.
                   4898:
                   4899: A package which needs the "makeinfo" command at build time must define the
                   4900: variable USE_MAKEINFO in its Makefile. If a minimum version of the "makeinfo"
                   4901: command is needed it should be noted with the TEXINFO_REQD variable in the
                   4902: package Makefile. By default, a minimum version of 3.12 is required. If the
                   4903: system does not provide a makeinfo command or if it does not match the required
                   4904: minimum, a build dependency on the devel/gtexinfo package will be added
                   4905: automatically.
                   4906:
                   4907: The build and installation process of the software provided by the package
                   4908: should not use the install-info command as the registration of info files is
1.20      ben      4909: the task of the package INSTALL script, and it must use the appropriate
1.1       grant    4910: makeinfo command.
                   4911:
1.47      reed     4912: To achieve this goal, the pkgsrc infrastructure creates overriding scripts for
1.1       grant    4913: the install-info and makeinfo commands in a directory listed early in PATH.
                   4914:
                   4915: The script overriding install-info has no effect except the logging of a
                   4916: message. The script overriding makeinfo logs a message and according to the
                   4917: value of USE_MAKEINFO and TEXINFO_REQD either run the appropriate makeinfo
                   4918: command or exit on error.
                   4919:
1.38      dillo    4920: 15.5.8. Packages installing GConf2 data files
1.1       grant    4921:
                   4922: If a package installs .schemas or .entries files, used by GConf2, you need to
                   4923: take some extra steps to make sure they get registered in the database:
                   4924:
                   4925:  1. Include ../../devel/GConf2/schemas.mk instead of its buildlink3.mk file.
                   4926:     This takes care of rebuilding the GConf2 database at installation and
                   4927:     deinstallation time, and tells the package where to install GConf2 data
                   4928:     files using some standard configure arguments. It also disallows any access
                   4929:     to the database directly from the package.
1.20      ben      4930:
1.1       grant    4931:  2. Ensure that the package installs its .schemas files under ${PREFIX}/share/
                   4932:     gconf/schemas. If they get installed under ${PREFIX}/etc, you will need to
                   4933:     manually patch the package.
1.20      ben      4934:
1.1       grant    4935:  3. Check the PLIST and remove any entries under the etc/gconf directory, as
1.38      dillo    4936:     they will be handled automatically. See Section 7.14, "How do I change the
1.35      jmmv     4937:     location of configuration files?" for more information.
1.20      ben      4938:
1.1       grant    4939:  4. Define the GCONF2_SCHEMAS variable in your Makefile with a list of all
                   4940:     .schemas files installed by the package, if any. Names must not contain any
                   4941:     directories in them.
1.20      ben      4942:
1.1       grant    4943:  5. Define the GCONF2_ENTRIES variable in your Makefile with a list of all
                   4944:     .entries files installed by the package, if any. Names must not contain any
                   4945:     directories in them.
1.20      ben      4946:
1.38      dillo    4947: 15.5.9. Packages installing scrollkeeper data files
1.1       grant    4948:
                   4949: If a package installs .omf files, used by scrollkeeper, you need to take some
                   4950: extra steps to make sure they get registered in the database:
                   4951:
                   4952:  1. Include ../../textproc/scrollkeeper/omf.mk instead of its buildlink3.mk
                   4953:     file. This takes care of rebuilding the scrollkeeper database at
                   4954:     installation and deinstallation time, and disallows any access to it
                   4955:     directly from the package.
1.20      ben      4956:
1.1       grant    4957:  2. Check the PLIST and remove any entries under the libdata/scrollkeeper
                   4958:     directory, as they will be handled automatically.
1.20      ben      4959:
1.1       grant    4960:  3. Remove the share/omf directory from the PLIST. It will be handled by
                   4961:     scrollkeeper.
1.20      ben      4962:
1.38      dillo    4963: 15.5.10. Packages installing X11 fonts
1.1       grant    4964:
                   4965: If a package installs font files, you will need to rebuild the fonts database
                   4966: in the directory where they get installed at installation and deinstallation
                   4967: time. This can be automatically done by using mk/fonts.mk, which you need to
                   4968: include in your Makefile.
                   4969:
                   4970: When the file is included, you can list the directories where fonts are
                   4971: installed in the FONTS_type_DIRS variables, where type can be one of "TTF",
                   4972: "TYPE1" or "X11". Also make sure that the database file fonts.dir is not listed
                   4973: in the PLIST.
                   4974:
                   4975: Note that you should not create new directories for fonts; instead use the
                   4976: standard ones to avoid that the user needs to manually configure his X server
                   4977: to find them.
                   4978:
1.38      dillo    4979: 15.5.11. Packages installing GTK2 modules
1.1       grant    4980:
1.47      reed     4981: If a package installs GTK2 immodules or loaders, you need to take some extra
1.1       grant    4982: steps to get them registered in the GTK2 database properly:
                   4983:
                   4984:  1. Include ../../x11/gtk2/modules.mk instead of its buildlink3.mk file. This
                   4985:     takes care of rebuilding the database at installation and deinstallation
                   4986:     time.
1.20      ben      4987:
1.1       grant    4988:  2. Set GTK2_IMMODULES=YES if your package installs GTK2 immodules.
1.20      ben      4989:
1.1       grant    4990:  3. Set GTK2_LOADERS=YES if your package installs GTK2 loaders.
1.20      ben      4991:
1.47      reed     4992:  4. Patch the package to not touch any of the GTK2 databases directly. These
1.1       grant    4993:     are:
1.20      ben      4994:
1.1       grant    4995:       * libdata/gtk-2.0/gdk-pixbuf.loaders
1.20      ben      4996:
1.1       grant    4997:       * libdata/gtk-2.0/gtk.immodules
1.20      ben      4998:
1.1       grant    4999:  5. Check the PLIST and remove any entries under the libdata/gtk-2.0 directory,
                   5000:     as they will be handled automatically.
1.20      ben      5001:
1.38      dillo    5002: 15.5.12. Packages installing SGML or XML data
1.1       grant    5003:
                   5004: If a package installs SGML or XML data files that need to be registered in
                   5005: system-wide catalogs (like DTDs, sub-catalogs, etc.), you need to take some
                   5006: extra steps:
                   5007:
                   5008:  1. Include ../../textproc/xmlcatmgr/catalogs.mk in your Makefile, which takes
                   5009:     care of registering those files in system-wide catalogs at installation and
                   5010:     deinstallation time.
1.20      ben      5011:
1.1       grant    5012:  2. Set SGML_CATALOGS to the full path of any SGML catalogs installed by the
                   5013:     package.
1.20      ben      5014:
1.1       grant    5015:  3. Set XML_CATALOGS to the full path of any XML catalogs installed by the
                   5016:     package.
1.20      ben      5017:
1.1       grant    5018:  4. Set SGML_ENTRIES to individual entries to be added to the SGML catalog.
                   5019:     These come in groups of three strings; see xmlcatmgr(1) for more
                   5020:     information (specifically, arguments recognized by the 'add' action). Note
                   5021:     that you will normally not use this variable.
1.20      ben      5022:
1.1       grant    5023:  5. Set XML_ENTRIES to individual entries to be added to the XML catalog. These
                   5024:     come in groups of three strings; see xmlcatmgr(1) for more information
                   5025:     (specifically, arguments recognized by the 'add' action). Note that you
                   5026:     will normally not use this variable.
1.20      ben      5027:
1.38      dillo    5028: 15.5.13. Packages installing extensions to the MIME database
1.1       grant    5029:
                   5030: If a package provides extensions to the MIME database by installing .xml files
                   5031: inside ${PREFIX}/share/mime/packages, you need to take some extra steps to
                   5032: ensure that the database is kept consistent with respect to these new files:
                   5033:
                   5034:  1. Include ../../databases/shared-mime-info/mimedb.mk (avoid using the
                   5035:     buildlink3.mk file from this same directory, which is reserved for
                   5036:     inclusion from other buildlink3.mk files). It takes care of rebuilding the
                   5037:     MIME database at installation and deinstallation time, and disallows any
                   5038:     access to it directly from the package.
1.20      ben      5039:
                   5040:  2. Check the PLIST and remove any entries under the share/mime directory,
1.1       grant    5041:     except for files saved under share/mime/packages. The former are handled
1.47      reed     5042:     automatically by the update-mime-database program, but the latter are
1.1       grant    5043:     package-dependent and must be removed by the package that installed them in
                   5044:     the first place.
1.20      ben      5045:
1.1       grant    5046:  3. Remove any share/mime/* directories from the PLIST. They will be handled by
                   5047:     the shared-mime-info package.
1.20      ben      5048:
1.38      dillo    5049: 15.5.14. Packages using intltool
1.1       grant    5050:
                   5051: If a package uses intltool during its build, include the ../../textproc/
                   5052: intltool/buildlink3.mk file, which forces it to use the intltool package
                   5053: provided by pkgsrc, instead of the one bundled with the distribution file.
                   5054:
                   5055: This tracks intltool's build-time dependencies and uses the latest available
                   5056: version; this way, the package benefits of any bug fixes that may have appeared
                   5057: since it was released.
                   5058:
1.38      dillo    5059: 15.5.15. Packages installing startup scripts
1.18      xtraeme  5060:
                   5061: If a package contains a rc.d script, it won't be copied into the startup
                   5062: directory by default, but you can enable it, by adding the option
                   5063: PKG_RCD_SCRIPTS=YES in /etc/mk.conf. This option will copy the scripts into /
                   5064: etc/rc.d when a package is installed, and it will automatically remove the
                   5065: scripts when the package is deinstalled.
                   5066:
1.38      dillo    5067: 15.6. Feedback to the author
1.1       grant    5068:
                   5069: If you have found any bugs in the package you make available, if you had to do
                   5070: special steps to make it run under NetBSD or if you enhanced the software in
                   5071: various other ways, be sure to report these changes back to the original author
                   5072: of the program! With that kind of support, the next release of the program can
                   5073: incorporate these fixes, and people not using the NetBSD packages system can
                   5074: win from your efforts.
                   5075:
                   5076: Support the idea of free software!
                   5077:
1.38      dillo    5078: Chapter 16. Debugging
1.1       grant    5079:
                   5080: To check out all the gotchas when building a package, here are the steps that I
                   5081: do in order to get a package working. Please note this is basically the same as
                   5082: what was explained in the previous sections, only with some debugging aids.
                   5083:
                   5084:   * Be sure to set PKG_DEVELOPER=1 in /etc/mk.conf
1.20      ben      5085:
1.1       grant    5086:   * Install pkgtools/url2pkg, create a directory for a new package, change into
                   5087:     it, then run url2pkg:
1.20      ben      5088:
1.1       grant    5089:     % mkdir /usr/pkgsrc/category/examplepkg
                   5090:     % cd /usr/pkgsrc/category/examplepkg
                   5091:     % url2pkg http://www.example.com/path/to/distfile.tar.gz
1.20      ben      5092:
1.1       grant    5093:   * Edit the Makefile as requested.
1.20      ben      5094:
1.1       grant    5095:   * Fill in the DESCR file
1.20      ben      5096:
1.1       grant    5097:   * Run make configure
1.20      ben      5098:
1.1       grant    5099:   * Add any dependencies glimpsed from documentation and the configure step to
                   5100:     the package's Makefile.
1.20      ben      5101:
1.1       grant    5102:   * Make the package compile, doing multiple rounds of
1.20      ben      5103:
1.1       grant    5104:     % make
                   5105:     % pkgvi ${WRKSRC}/some/file/that/does/not/compile
                   5106:     % mkpatches
                   5107:     % patchdiff
                   5108:     % mv ${WRKDIR}/.newpatches/* patches
                   5109:     % make mps
                   5110:     % make clean
1.20      ben      5111:
1.1       grant    5112:     Doing as non-root user will ensure that no files are modified that
1.20      ben      5113:     shouldn't be, especially during the build phase. mkpatches, patchdiff and
1.1       grant    5114:     pkgvi are from the pkgtools/pkgdiff package.
1.20      ben      5115:
1.38      dillo    5116:   * Look at the Makefile, fix if necessary; see Section 8.1, "Makefile".
1.20      ben      5117:
1.1       grant    5118:   * Generate a PLIST:
1.20      ben      5119:
1.1       grant    5120:     # make install
                   5121:     # make print-PLIST >PLIST
                   5122:     # make deinstall
                   5123:     # make install
                   5124:     # make deinstall
1.20      ben      5125:
1.1       grant    5126:     You usually need to be root to do this. Look if there are any files left:
1.20      ben      5127:
1.1       grant    5128:     # make print-PLIST
1.20      ben      5129:
1.1       grant    5130:     If this reveals any files that are missing in PLIST, add them.
1.20      ben      5131:
1.1       grant    5132:   * Now that the PLIST is OK, install the package again and make a binary
                   5133:     package:
1.20      ben      5134:
1.1       grant    5135:     # make reinstall
                   5136:     # make package
1.20      ben      5137:
1.1       grant    5138:   * Delete the installed package:
1.20      ben      5139:
1.1       grant    5140:     # pkg_delete blub
1.20      ben      5141:
1.1       grant    5142:   * Repeat the above make print-PLIST command, which shouldn't find anything
                   5143:     now:
1.20      ben      5144:
1.1       grant    5145:     # make print-PLIST
1.20      ben      5146:
1.1       grant    5147:   * Reinstall the binary package:
1.20      ben      5148:
1.1       grant    5149:     # pkgadd .../blub.tgz
1.20      ben      5150:
1.1       grant    5151:   * Play with it. Make sure everything works.
1.20      ben      5152:
1.1       grant    5153:   * Run pkglint from pkgtools/pkglint, and fix the problems it reports:
1.20      ben      5154:
1.1       grant    5155:     # pkglint
1.20      ben      5156:
1.38      dillo    5157:   * Submit (or commit, if you have cvs access); see Chapter 17, Submitting and
1.1       grant    5158:     Committing.
1.20      ben      5159:
1.38      dillo    5160: Chapter 17. Submitting and Committing
1.1       grant    5161:
                   5162: Table of Contents
                   5163:
1.38      dillo    5164: 17.1. Submitting your packages
1.41      wiz      5165: 17.2. General notes when adding, updating, or removing packages
                   5166: 17.3. Committing: Importing a package into CVS
                   5167: 17.4. Updating a package to a newer version
                   5168: 17.5. Moving a package in pkgsrc
1.1       grant    5169:
1.38      dillo    5170: 17.1. Submitting your packages
1.1       grant    5171:
                   5172: You have to separate between binary and "normal" (source) packages here:
                   5173:
                   5174:   * precompiled binary packages
1.20      ben      5175:
1.1       grant    5176:     Our policy is that we accept binaries only from pkgsrc developers to
                   5177:     guarantee that the packages don't contain any trojan horses etc. This is
1.13      hubertf  5178:     not to annoy anyone but rather to protect our users! You're still free to
                   5179:     put up your home-made binary packages and tell the world where to get them.
1.20      ben      5180:     NetBSD developers doing bulk builds and wanting to upload them please see
1.38      dillo    5181:     Section 6.3.8, "Uploading results of a bulk build".
1.20      ben      5182:
1.1       grant    5183:   * packages
1.20      ben      5184:
                   5185:     First, check that your package is complete, compiles and runs well; see
1.38      dillo    5186:     Chapter 16, Debugging and the rest of this document. Next, generate an
1.1       grant    5187:     uuencoded gzipped tar(1) archive, preferably with all files in a single
                   5188:     directory. Finally, send-pr with category "pkg", a synopsis which includes
                   5189:     the package name and version number, a short description of your package
                   5190:     (contents of the COMMENT variable or DESCR file are OK) and attach the
                   5191:     archive to your PR.
1.20      ben      5192:
1.1       grant    5193:     If you want to submit several packages, please send a separate PR for each
                   5194:     one, it's easier for us to track things that way.
1.20      ben      5195:
1.1       grant    5196:     Alternatively, you can also import new packages into pkgsrc-wip ("pkgsrc
                   5197:     work-in-progress"); see the homepage at http://pkgsrc-wip.sourceforge.net/
                   5198:     for details.
1.20      ben      5199:
1.41      wiz      5200: 17.2. General notes when adding, updating, or removing packages
                   5201:
                   5202: Please note all package additions, updates, moves, and removals in pkgsrc/doc/
                   5203: CHANGES. It's very important to keep this file up to date and conforming to the
                   5204: existing format, because it will be used by scripts to automatically update
                   5205: pages on www.NetBSD.org and other sites. Additionally, check the pkgsrc/doc/
                   5206: TODO file and remove the entry for the package you updated or removed, in case
                   5207: it was mentioned there.
                   5208:
                   5209: There is a make target that helps in creating proper CHANGES entries: make
                   5210: changes-entry. It uses the optional CTYPE and NETBSD_LOGIN_NAME variables. The
                   5211: general usage is to first make sure that your CHANGES file is up-to-date (to
                   5212: avoid having to resolve conflicts later-on) and then to cd to the package
                   5213: directory. For package updates, make changes-entry is enough. For new packages,
                   5214: or package moves or removals, set the CTYPE variable on the command line to
                   5215: "Added", "Moved", or "Removed". You can set NETBSD_LOGIN_NAME in /etc/mk.conf
                   5216: if your local login name is not the same as your NetBSD login name. Don't
                   5217: forget to commit the changes to pkgsrc/doc/CHANGES!
                   5218:
                   5219: 17.3. Committing: Importing a package into CVS
1.1       grant    5220:
                   5221: This section is only of interest for pkgsrc developers with write access to the
                   5222: pkgsrc repository. Please remember that cvs imports files relative to the
                   5223: current working directory, and that the pathname that you give the cvs import
                   5224: command is so that it knows where to place the files in the repository. Newly
                   5225: created packages should be imported with a vendor tag of "TNF" and a release
                   5226: tag of "pkgsrc-base", e.g:
                   5227:
1.51    ! rillig   5228:     $ cd .../pkgsrc/category/pkgname
        !          5229:     $ cvs import pkgsrc/category/pkgname TNF pkgsrc-base
1.1       grant    5230:
                   5231: Remember to move the directory from which you imported out of the way, or cvs
                   5232: will complain the next time you "cvs update" your source tree. Also don't
                   5233: forget to add the new package to the category's Makefile.
                   5234:
                   5235: The commit message of the initial import should include part of the DESCR file,
                   5236: so people reading the mailing lists know what the package is/does.
                   5237:
                   5238: For new packages, "cvs import" is preferred to "cvs add" because the former
                   5239: gets everything with a single command, and provides a consistent tag.
                   5240:
1.41      wiz      5241: 17.4. Updating a package to a newer version
1.1       grant    5242:
                   5243: Please always put a concise, appropriate and relevant summary of the changes
                   5244: between old and new versions into the commit log when updating a package. There
                   5245: are various reasons for this:
                   5246:
                   5247:   * A URL is volatile, and can change over time. It may go away completely or
                   5248:     its information may be overwritten by newer information.
1.20      ben      5249:
1.1       grant    5250:   * Having the change information between old and new versions in our CVS
                   5251:     repository is very useful for people who use either cvs or anoncvs.
1.20      ben      5252:
1.1       grant    5253:   * Having the change information between old and new versions in our CVS
                   5254:     repository is very useful for people who read the pkgsrc-changes mailing
                   5255:     list, so that they can make tactical decisions about when to upgrade the
                   5256:     package.
1.20      ben      5257:
1.18      xtraeme  5258: Please also recognize that, just because a new version of a package has been
1.1       grant    5259: released, it should not automatically be upgraded in the CVS repository. We
                   5260: prefer to be conservative in the packages that are included in pkgsrc -
                   5261: development or beta packages are not really the best thing for most places in
                   5262: which pkgsrc is used. Please use your judgement about what should go into
                   5263: pkgsrc, and bear in mind that stability is to be preferred above new and
                   5264: possibly untested features.
                   5265:
1.41      wiz      5266: 17.5. Moving a package in pkgsrc
1.1       grant    5267:
                   5268:  1. Make a copy of the directory somewhere else.
1.20      ben      5269:
1.1       grant    5270:  2. Remove all CVS dirs.
1.20      ben      5271:
1.1       grant    5272:     Alternatively to the first two steps you can also do:
1.20      ben      5273:
1.1       grant    5274:     % cvs -d user@cvs.NetBSD.org:/cvsroot export -D today pkgsrc/category/package
1.20      ben      5275:
1.1       grant    5276:     and use that for further work.
1.20      ben      5277:
1.1       grant    5278:  3. Fix CATEGORIES and any DEPENDS paths that just did "../package" instead of
                   5279:     "../../category/package".
1.20      ben      5280:
1.1       grant    5281:  4. cvs import the modified package in the new place.
1.20      ben      5282:
1.1       grant    5283:  5. Check if any package depends on it:
1.20      ben      5284:
1.1       grant    5285:     % cd /usr/pkgsrc
                   5286:     % grep /package */*/Makefile* */*/buildlink*
1.20      ben      5287:
1.1       grant    5288:  6. Fix paths in packages from step 5 to point to new location.
1.20      ben      5289:
1.1       grant    5290:  7. cvs rm (-f) the package at the old location.
1.20      ben      5291:
1.1       grant    5292:  8. Remove from oldcategory/Makefile.
1.20      ben      5293:
1.1       grant    5294:  9. Add to newcategory/Makefile.
1.20      ben      5295:
1.1       grant    5296: 10. Commit the changed and removed files:
1.20      ben      5297:
1.1       grant    5298:     % cvs commit oldcategory/package oldcategory/Makefile newcategory/Makefile
1.20      ben      5299:
1.1       grant    5300:     (and any packages from step 5, of course).
1.20      ben      5301:
1.46      gdt      5302: Appendix A. A simple example package: bison
1.1       grant    5303:
                   5304: Table of Contents
                   5305:
1.46      gdt      5306: A.1. files
1.20      ben      5307:
1.46      gdt      5308:     A.1.1. Makefile
                   5309:     A.1.2. DESCR
                   5310:     A.1.3. PLIST
                   5311:     A.1.4. Checking a package with pkglint
1.20      ben      5312:
1.46      gdt      5313: A.2. Steps for building, installing, packaging
1.1       grant    5314:
                   5315: We checked to find a piece of software that wasn't in the packages collection,
1.20      ben      5316: and picked GNU bison. Quite why someone would want to have bison when Berkeley
1.1       grant    5317: yacc is already present in the tree is beyond us, but it's useful for the
                   5318: purposes of this exercise.
                   5319:
1.46      gdt      5320: A.1. files
1.1       grant    5321:
1.46      gdt      5322: A.1.1. Makefile
1.1       grant    5323:
1.51    ! rillig   5324:     # $NetBSD$
        !          5325:     #
        !          5326:
        !          5327:     DISTNAME=       bison-1.25
        !          5328:     CATEGORIES=     devel
        !          5329:     MASTER_SITES=   ${MASTER_SITE_GNU}
1.1       grant    5330:
1.51    ! rillig   5331:     MAINTAINER=     thorpej@NetBSD.org
        !          5332:     HOMEPAGE=       http://www.gnu.org/software/bison/bison.html
        !          5333:     COMMENT=        GNU yacc clone
1.1       grant    5334:
1.51    ! rillig   5335:     GNU_CONFIGURE=  yes
        !          5336:     INFO_FILES=     bison.info
1.1       grant    5337:
1.51    ! rillig   5338:     .include "../../mk/bsd.pkg.mk"
1.1       grant    5339:
1.46      gdt      5340: A.1.2. DESCR
1.1       grant    5341:
1.51    ! rillig   5342:     GNU version of yacc.  Can make re-entrant parsers, and numerous other
        !          5343:     improvements.  Why you would want this when Berkeley yacc(1) is part
        !          5344:     of the NetBSD source tree is beyond me.
1.1       grant    5345:
1.46      gdt      5346: A.1.3. PLIST
1.1       grant    5347:
1.51    ! rillig   5348:     @comment $NetBSD$
        !          5349:     bin/bison
        !          5350:     man/man1/bison.1.gz
        !          5351:     share/bison.simple
        !          5352:     share/bison.hairy
1.1       grant    5353:
1.46      gdt      5354: A.1.4. Checking a package with pkglint
1.1       grant    5355:
                   5356: The NetBSD package system comes with pkgtools/pkglint which helps to check the
                   5357: contents of these files. After installation it is quite easy to use, just
                   5358: change to the directory of the package you wish to examine and execute pkglint:
                   5359:
                   5360: $ pkglint
                   5361: looks fine.
                   5362:
1.47      reed     5363: Depending on the supplied command line arguments (see pkglint(1)), more verbose
1.1       grant    5364: checks will be performed. Use e.g. pkglint -v for a very verbose check.
                   5365:
1.46      gdt      5366: A.2. Steps for building, installing, packaging
1.1       grant    5367:
                   5368: Create the directory where the package lives, plus any auxiliary directories:
                   5369:
                   5370: # cd /usr/pkgsrc/lang
                   5371: # mkdir bison
                   5372: # cd bison
                   5373: # mkdir patches
                   5374:
1.38      dillo    5375: Create Makefile, DESCR and PLIST (see Chapter 8, Package components - files,
1.1       grant    5376: directories and contents) then continue with fetching the distfile:
                   5377:
                   5378: # make fetch
                   5379: >> bison-1.25.tar.gz doesn't seem to exist on this system.
                   5380: >> Attempting to fetch from ftp://prep.ai.mit.edu/pub/gnu//.
                   5381: Requesting ftp://prep.ai.mit.edu/pub/gnu//bison-1.25.tar.gz (via ftp://orpheus.amdahl.com:80/)
                   5382: ftp: Error retrieving file: 500 Internal error
                   5383:
                   5384: >> Attempting to fetch from ftp://wuarchive.wustl.edu/systems/gnu//.
                   5385: Requesting ftp://wuarchive.wustl.edu/systems/gnu//bison-1.25.tar.gz (via ftp://orpheus.amdahl.com:80/)
                   5386: ftp: Error retrieving file: 500 Internal error
                   5387:
                   5388: >> Attempting to fetch from ftp://ftp.freebsd.org/pub/FreeBSD/distfiles//.
                   5389: Requesting ftp://ftp.freebsd.org/pub/FreeBSD/distfiles//bison-1.25.tar.gz (via ftp://orpheus.amdahl.com:80/)
                   5390: Successfully retrieved file.
                   5391:
                   5392: Generate the checksum of the distfile into distinfo:
                   5393:
                   5394: # make makesum
                   5395:
                   5396: Now compile:
                   5397:
                   5398: # make
                   5399: >> Checksum OK for bison-1.25.tar.gz.
                   5400: ===>  Extracting for bison-1.25
                   5401: ===>  Patching for bison-1.25
                   5402: ===>   Ignoring empty patch directory
                   5403: ===>  Configuring for bison-1.25
                   5404: creating cache ./config.cache
                   5405: checking for gcc... cc
                   5406: checking whether we are using GNU C... yes
                   5407: checking for a BSD compatible install... /usr/bin/install -c -o bin -g bin
                   5408: checking how to run the C preprocessor... cc -E
                   5409: checking for minix/config.h... no
                   5410: checking for POSIXized ISC... no
                   5411: checking whether cross-compiling... no
                   5412: checking for ANSI C header files... yes
                   5413: checking for string.h... yes
                   5414: checking for stdlib.h... yes
                   5415: checking for memory.h... yes
                   5416: checking for working const... yes
                   5417: checking for working alloca.h... no
                   5418: checking for alloca... yes
                   5419: checking for strerror... yes
                   5420: updating cache ./config.cache
                   5421: creating ./config.status
                   5422: creating Makefile
                   5423: ===>  Building for bison-1.25
                   5424: cc -c -DSTDC_HEADERS=1 -DHAVE_STRING_H=1 -DHAVE_STDLIB_H=1 -DHAVE_MEMORY_H=1 -DHAVE_ALLOCA=1 -DHAVE_STRERROR=1 -I./../include  -g LR0.c
                   5425: cc -c -DSTDC_HEADERS=1 -DHAVE_STRING_H=1 -DHAVE_STDLIB_H=1 -DHAVE_MEMORY_H=1 -DHAVE_ALLOCA=1 -DHAVE_STRERROR=1 -I./../include  -g allocate.c
                   5426: cc -c -DSTDC_HEADERS=1 -DHAVE_STRING_H=1 -DHAVE_STDLIB_H=1 -DHAVE_MEMORY_H=1 -DHAVE_ALLOCA=1 -DHAVE_STRERROR=1 -I./../include  -g closure.c
                   5427: cc -c -DSTDC_HEADERS=1 -DHAVE_STRING_H=1 -DHAVE_STDLIB_H=1 -DHAVE_MEMORY_H=1 -DHAVE_ALLOCA=1 -DHAVE_STRERROR=1 -I./../include  -g conflicts.c
                   5428: cc -c -DSTDC_HEADERS=1 -DHAVE_STRING_H=1 -DHAVE_STDLIB_H=1 -DHAVE_MEMORY_H=1 -DHAVE_ALLOCA=1 -DHAVE_STRERROR=1 -I./../include  -g derives.c
1.20      ben      5429: cc -c -DXPFILE=\"/usr/pkg/share/bison.simple\"  -DXPFILE1=\"/usr/pkg/share/bison.hairy\" -DSTDC_HEADERS=1 -DHAVE_STRING_H=1 -DHAVE_STDLIB_H=1 -DHAVE_MEMORY_H=1 -DHAVE_ALLOCA=1 -DHAVE_STRERROR=1  -g  ./files.c
1.1       grant    5430: cc -c -DSTDC_HEADERS=1 -DHAVE_STRING_H=1 -DHAVE_STDLIB_H=1 -DHAVE_MEMORY_H=1 -DHAVE_ALLOCA=1 -DHAVE_STRERROR=1 -I./../include  -g getargs.c
                   5431: cc -c -DSTDC_HEADERS=1 -DHAVE_STRING_H=1 -DHAVE_STDLIB_H=1 -DHAVE_MEMORY_H=1 -DHAVE_ALLOCA=1 -DHAVE_STRERROR=1 -I./../include  -g gram.c
                   5432: cc -c -DSTDC_HEADERS=1 -DHAVE_STRING_H=1 -DHAVE_STDLIB_H=1 -DHAVE_MEMORY_H=1 -DHAVE_ALLOCA=1 -DHAVE_STRERROR=1 -I./../include  -g lalr.c
                   5433: cc -c -DSTDC_HEADERS=1 -DHAVE_STRING_H=1 -DHAVE_STDLIB_H=1 -DHAVE_MEMORY_H=1 -DHAVE_ALLOCA=1 -DHAVE_STRERROR=1 -I./../include  -g lex.c
                   5434: cc -c -DSTDC_HEADERS=1 -DHAVE_STRING_H=1 -DHAVE_STDLIB_H=1 -DHAVE_MEMORY_H=1 -DHAVE_ALLOCA=1 -DHAVE_STRERROR=1 -I./../include  -g main.c
                   5435: cc -c -DSTDC_HEADERS=1 -DHAVE_STRING_H=1 -DHAVE_STDLIB_H=1 -DHAVE_MEMORY_H=1 -DHAVE_ALLOCA=1 -DHAVE_STRERROR=1 -I./../include  -g nullable.c
                   5436: cc -c -DSTDC_HEADERS=1 -DHAVE_STRING_H=1 -DHAVE_STDLIB_H=1 -DHAVE_MEMORY_H=1 -DHAVE_ALLOCA=1 -DHAVE_STRERROR=1 -I./../include  -g output.c
                   5437: cc -c -DSTDC_HEADERS=1 -DHAVE_STRING_H=1 -DHAVE_STDLIB_H=1 -DHAVE_MEMORY_H=1 -DHAVE_ALLOCA=1 -DHAVE_STRERROR=1 -I./../include  -g print.c
                   5438: cc -c -DSTDC_HEADERS=1 -DHAVE_STRING_H=1 -DHAVE_STDLIB_H=1 -DHAVE_MEMORY_H=1 -DHAVE_ALLOCA=1 -DHAVE_STRERROR=1 -I./../include  -g reader.c
                   5439: cc -c -DSTDC_HEADERS=1 -DHAVE_STRING_H=1 -DHAVE_STDLIB_H=1 -DHAVE_MEMORY_H=1 -DHAVE_ALLOCA=1 -DHAVE_STRERROR=1 -I./../include  -g reduce.c
                   5440: cc -c -DSTDC_HEADERS=1 -DHAVE_STRING_H=1 -DHAVE_STDLIB_H=1 -DHAVE_MEMORY_H=1 -DHAVE_ALLOCA=1 -DHAVE_STRERROR=1 -I./../include  -g symtab.c
                   5441: cc -c -DSTDC_HEADERS=1 -DHAVE_STRING_H=1 -DHAVE_STDLIB_H=1 -DHAVE_MEMORY_H=1 -DHAVE_ALLOCA=1 -DHAVE_STRERROR=1 -I./../include  -g warshall.c
                   5442: cc -c -DSTDC_HEADERS=1 -DHAVE_STRING_H=1 -DHAVE_STDLIB_H=1 -DHAVE_MEMORY_H=1 -DHAVE_ALLOCA=1 -DHAVE_STRERROR=1 -I./../include  -g version.c
                   5443: cc -c -DSTDC_HEADERS=1 -DHAVE_STRING_H=1 -DHAVE_STDLIB_H=1 -DHAVE_MEMORY_H=1 -DHAVE_ALLOCA=1 -DHAVE_STRERROR=1 -I./../include  -g getopt.c
                   5444: cc -c -DSTDC_HEADERS=1 -DHAVE_STRING_H=1 -DHAVE_STDLIB_H=1 -DHAVE_MEMORY_H=1 -DHAVE_ALLOCA=1 -DHAVE_STRERROR=1 -I./../include  -g getopt1.c
                   5445: cc  -g -o bison LR0.o allocate.o closure.o conflicts.o derives.o files.o         getargs.o gram.o lalr.o lex.o                                   main.o nullable.o output.o print.o reader.o reduce.o symtab.o   warshall.o version.o getopt.o getopt1.o
                   5446: ./files.c:240: warning: mktemp() possibly used unsafely, consider using mkstemp()
                   5447: rm -f bison.s1
                   5448: sed -e "/^#line/ s|bison|/usr/pkg/share/bison|" < ./bison.simple > bison.s1
                   5449:
                   5450: Everything seems OK, so install the files:
                   5451:
                   5452: # make install
                   5453: >> Checksum OK for bison-1.25.tar.gz.
                   5454: ===>  Installing for bison-1.25
                   5455: sh ./mkinstalldirs /usr/pkg/bin /usr/pkg/share  /usr/pkg/info /usr/pkg/man/man1
                   5456: rm -f /usr/pkg/bin/bison
                   5457: cd /usr/pkg/share; rm -f bison.simple bison.hairy
                   5458: rm -f /usr/pkg/man/man1/bison.1 /usr/pkg/info/bison.info*
                   5459: install -c  -o bin -g bin -m 555 bison /usr/pkg/bin/bison
                   5460: /usr/bin/install -c -o bin -g bin -m 644 bison.s1 /usr/pkg/share/bison.simple
                   5461: /usr/bin/install -c -o bin -g bin -m 644 ./bison.hairy /usr/pkg/share/bison.hairy
                   5462: cd .; for f in bison.info*;  do /usr/bin/install -c -o bin -g bin -m 644 $f /usr/pkg/info/$f; done
                   5463: /usr/bin/install -c -o bin -g bin -m 644 ./bison.1 /usr/pkg/man/man1/bison.1
                   5464: ===>  Registering installation for bison-1.25
                   5465:
                   5466: You can now use bison, and also - if you decide so - remove it with pkg_delete
                   5467: bison. Should you decide that you want a binary package, do this now:
                   5468:
                   5469: # make package
                   5470: >> Checksum OK for bison-1.25.tar.gz.
                   5471: ===>  Building package for bison-1.25
                   5472: Creating package bison-1.25.tgz
                   5473: Registering depends:.
                   5474: Creating gzip'd tar ball in '/u/pkgsrc/lang/bison/bison-1.25.tgz'
                   5475:
                   5476: Now that you don't need the source and object files any more, clean up:
                   5477:
                   5478: # make clean
                   5479: ===>  Cleaning for bison-1.25
                   5480:
1.46      gdt      5481: Appendix B. Build logs
1.1       grant    5482:
                   5483: Table of Contents
                   5484:
1.46      gdt      5485: B.1. Building figlet
                   5486: B.2. Packaging figlet
1.1       grant    5487:
1.46      gdt      5488: B.1. Building figlet
1.1       grant    5489:
                   5490: # make
                   5491: ===> Checking for vulnerabilities in figlet-2.2.1nb2
                   5492: => figlet221.tar.gz doesn't seem to exist on this system.
                   5493: => Attempting to fetch figlet221.tar.gz from ftp://ftp.figlet.org/pub/figlet/program/unix/.
                   5494: => [172219 bytes]
                   5495: Connected to ftp.plig.net.
                   5496: 220 ftp.plig.org NcFTPd Server (licensed copy) ready.
                   5497: 331 Guest login ok, send your complete e-mail address as password.
                   5498: 230-You are user #5 of 500 simultaneous users allowed.
                   5499: 230-
1.20      ben      5500: 230-  ___ _             _ _
                   5501: 230- |  _| |_ ___   ___| |_|___   ___ ___ ___
1.1       grant    5502: 230- |  _|  _| . |_| . | | | . |_| . |  _| . |
                   5503: 230- |_| |_| |  _|_|  _|_|_|_  |_|___|_| |_  |
                   5504: 230-         |_|   |_|     |___|         |___|
                   5505: 230-
                   5506: 230-** Welcome to ftp.plig.org **
                   5507: 230-
                   5508: 230-Please note that all transfers from this FTP site are logged. If you
                   5509: 230-do not like this, please disconnect now.
                   5510: 230-
                   5511: 230-This arhive is available via
                   5512: 230-
                   5513: 230-HTTP:  http://ftp.plig.org/
                   5514: 230-FTP:   ftp://ftp.plig.org/     (max 500 connections)
                   5515: 230-RSYNC: rsync://ftp.plig.org/   (max  30 connections)
                   5516: 230-
                   5517: 230-Please email comments, bug reports and requests for packages to be
1.20      ben      5518: 230-mirrored to ftp-admin@plig.org.
1.1       grant    5519: 230-
                   5520: 230-
                   5521: 230 Logged in anonymously.
                   5522: Remote system type is UNIX.
                   5523: Using binary mode to transfer files.
                   5524: 200 Type okay.
                   5525: 250 "/pub" is new cwd.
                   5526: 250-"/pub/figlet" is new cwd.
                   5527: 250-
                   5528: 250-Welcome to the figlet archive at ftp.figlet.org
1.20      ben      5529: 250-
1.1       grant    5530: 250-    ftp://ftp.figlet.org/pub/figlet/
                   5531: 250-
                   5532: 250-The official FIGlet web page is:
                   5533: 250-    http://www.figlet.org/
                   5534: 250-
                   5535: 250-If you have questions, please mailto:info@figlet.org. If you want to
                   5536: 250-contribute a font or something else, you can email us.
1.20      ben      5537: 250
1.1       grant    5538: 250 "/pub/figlet/program" is new cwd.
                   5539: 250 "/pub/figlet/program/unix" is new cwd.
                   5540: local: figlet221.tar.gz remote: figlet221.tar.gz
                   5541: 502 Unimplemented command.
                   5542: 227 Entering Passive Mode (195,40,6,41,246,104)
                   5543: 150 Data connection accepted from 84.128.86.72:65131; transfer starting for figlet221.tar.gz (172219 bytes).
                   5544: 38% |**************                       | 65800      64.16 KB/s    00:01 ETA
                   5545: 226 Transfer completed.
                   5546: 172219 bytes received in 00:02 (75.99 KB/s)
                   5547: 221 Goodbye.
                   5548: => Checksum OK for figlet221.tar.gz.
                   5549: ===> Extracting for figlet-2.2.1nb2
                   5550: ===> Required installed package ccache-[0-9]*: ccache-2.3nb1 found
                   5551: ===> Patching for figlet-2.2.1nb2
                   5552: ===> Applying pkgsrc patches for figlet-2.2.1nb2
                   5553: ===> Overriding tools for figlet-2.2.1nb2
                   5554: ===> Creating toolchain wrappers for figlet-2.2.1nb2
                   5555: ===> Configuring for figlet-2.2.1nb2
                   5556: ===> Building for figlet-2.2.1nb2
                   5557: gcc -O2 -DDEFAULTFONTDIR=\"/usr/pkg/share/figlet\"  -DDEFAULTFONTFILE=\"standard.flf\"  figlet.c zipio.c crc.c inflate.c -o figlet
                   5558: chmod a+x figlet
                   5559: gcc -O2 -o chkfont chkfont.c
                   5560: => Unwrapping files-to-be-installed.
                   5561: #
                   5562: # make install
                   5563: ===> Checking for vulnerabilities in figlet-2.2.1nb2
                   5564: ===> Installing for figlet-2.2.1nb2
                   5565: install -d -o root -g wheel -m 755 /usr/pkg/bin
                   5566: install -d -o root -g wheel -m 755 /usr/pkg/man/man6
                   5567: mkdir -p /usr/pkg/share/figlet
                   5568: cp figlet /usr/pkg/bin
                   5569: cp chkfont /usr/pkg/bin
                   5570: chmod 555 figlist showfigfonts
                   5571: cp figlist /usr/pkg/bin
                   5572: cp showfigfonts /usr/pkg/bin
                   5573: cp fonts/*.flf /usr/pkg/share/figlet
                   5574: cp fonts/*.flc /usr/pkg/share/figlet
                   5575: cp figlet.6 /usr/pkg/man/man6
                   5576: ===> Registering installation for figlet-2.2.1nb2
                   5577: #
                   5578:
1.46      gdt      5579: B.2. Packaging figlet
1.1       grant    5580:
                   5581: # make package
                   5582: ===> Checking for vulnerabilities in figlet-2.2.1nb2
                   5583: ===> Packaging figlet-2.2.1nb2
                   5584: ===> Building binary package for figlet-2.2.1nb2
                   5585: Creating package /home/cvs/pkgsrc/packages/i386/All/figlet-2.2.1nb2.tgz
                   5586: Using SrcDir value of /usr/pkg
1.20      ben      5587: Registering depends:.
1.1       grant    5588: #
                   5589:
1.46      gdt      5590: Appendix C. Layout of the FTP server's package archive
1.1       grant    5591:
                   5592: Layout for precompiled binary packages on ftp.NetBSD.org:
                   5593:
1.51    ! rillig   5594:     /pub/NetBSD/packages/
        !          5595:         distfiles/
1.20      ben      5596:
1.51    ! rillig   5597:         # Unpacked pkgsrc trees
        !          5598:         pkgsrc-current -> /pub/NetBSD/NetBSD-current/pkgsrc
        !          5599:         pkgsrc-2003Q4 -> N/A
        !          5600:         pkgsrc-2004Q1/pkgsrc
        !          5601:
        !          5602:         # pkgsrc archives
        !          5603:         pkgsrc-current.tar.gz -> ../NetBSD-current/tar_files/pkgsrc.tar.gz
        !          5604:         pkgsrc-2003Q4.tar.gz -> N/A
        !          5605:         pkgsrc-2004Q1.tar.gz -> N/A
        !          5606:
        !          5607:         # Per pkgsrc-release/OS-release/arch package archives
        !          5608:         pkgsrc-2003Q4/
        !          5609:             NetBSD-1.6.2/
        !          5610:                 i386/
        !          5611:                     All/
        !          5612:                     archivers/
        !          5613:                         foo -> ../All/foo
        !          5614:                     ...
        !          5615:         pkgsrc-2004Q1/
        !          5616:             NetBSD-1.6.2/
        !          5617:                 i386/
        !          5618:                     All/
        !          5619:                     ...
        !          5620:             NetBSD-2.0/
        !          5621:                 i386/
        !          5622:                     All/
        !          5623:                     ...
        !          5624:             SunOS-5.9/
        !          5625:                 sparc/
        !          5626:                     All/
        !          5627:                     ...
        !          5628:                 x86/
        !          5629:                     All/
        !          5630:                     ...
        !          5631:
        !          5632:         # Per os-release package archive convenience links
        !          5633:         NetBSD-1.6.2 -> 1.6.2
        !          5634:         1.6.2/
        !          5635:             i386 -> ../pkgsrc-2004Q1/NetBSD-1.6.2/i386
        !          5636:             m68k/
        !          5637:                 All/
        !          5638:                 archivers/
        !          5639:                     foo -> ../All/foo
        !          5640:                 ...
        !          5641:             amiga -> m68k
        !          5642:             atari -> m68k
        !          5643:             ...
        !          5644:
        !          5645:         2.0 -> NetBSD-2.0       # backward compat, historic
        !          5646:         NetBSD-2.0/
        !          5647:             i386 -> ../pkgsrc-2004Q1/NetBSD-2.0/i386
        !          5648:         SunOS-5.9/
        !          5649:             sparc -> ../pkgsrc-2004Q1/SunOS-5.9/sparc
        !          5650:             x86 -> ../pkgsrc-2004Q1/SunOS-5.9/x86
1.1       grant    5651:
                   5652: To create:
                   5653:
1.38      dillo    5654:  1. Run bulk build, see Section 6.3, "Doing a bulk build of all packages"
1.20      ben      5655:
1.1       grant    5656:  2. Upload /usr/pkgsrc/packages to
1.20      ben      5657:
1.1       grant    5658:         ftp://ftp.NetBSD.org/pub/NetBSD/packages/\
1.51    ! rillig   5659:             pkgsrc-2004Q4/\             # pkgsrc-branch
        !          5660:             `uname -s`-`uname -r`/\     # OS & version
        !          5661:             `uname -p`                  # architecture
1.20      ben      5662:
1.2       hubertf  5663:  3. If necessary, create a symlink ln -s `uname -m` `uname -p` (amiga -> m68k,
                   5664:     ...)
1.20      ben      5665:
1.46      gdt      5666: Appendix D. Editing guidelines for the pkgsrc guide
1.2       hubertf  5667:
                   5668: Table of Contents
                   5669:
1.46      gdt      5670: D.1. Targets
                   5671: D.2. Procedure
1.1       grant    5672:
1.2       hubertf  5673: This section contains information on editing the pkgsrc guide itself.
1.1       grant    5674:
1.46      gdt      5675: D.1. Targets
1.1       grant    5676:
1.2       hubertf  5677: The pkgsrc guide's source code is stored in pkgsrc/doc/guide/files, and several
                   5678: files are created from it:
                   5679:
1.23      wiz      5680:   * pkgsrc/doc/pkgsrc.txt
1.20      ben      5681:
1.2       hubertf  5682:   * pkgsrc/doc/pkgsrc.html
1.20      ben      5683:
1.2       hubertf  5684:   * http://www.NetBSD.org/Documentation/pkgsrc/: the documentation on the
                   5685:     NetBSD website will be built from pkgsrc and kept up to date on the web
                   5686:     server itself. This means you must make sure that your changes haven't
                   5687:     broken the build!
1.20      ben      5688:
1.6       hubertf  5689:   * http://www.NetBSD.org/Documentation/pkgsrc/pkgsrc.pdf: PDF version of the
                   5690:     pkgsrc guide.
1.20      ben      5691:
1.6       hubertf  5692:   * http://www.NetBSD.org/Documentation/pkgsrc/pkgsrc.ps: PostScript version of
                   5693:     the pkgsrc guide.
1.20      ben      5694:
1.46      gdt      5695: D.2. Procedure
1.2       hubertf  5696:
                   5697: The procedure to edit the pkgsrc guide is:
                   5698:
1.6       hubertf  5699:   * Make sure you have the packages needed to re-generate the pkgsrc guide (and
1.11      ben      5700:     other XML-based NetBSD documentation) installed. These are "netbsd-doc" for
1.47      reed     5701:     creating the ASCII and HTML versions, and "netbsd-doc-print" for the
                   5702:     PostScript and PDF versions. You will need both packages installed, to make
1.6       hubertf  5703:     sure documentation is consistent across all formats. The packages can be
                   5704:     found in pkgsrc/meta-pkgs/netbsd-doc and pkgsrc/meta-pkgs/netbsd-doc-print.
1.20      ben      5705:
1.6       hubertf  5706:   * Edit the XML file(s) in pkgsrc/doc/guide/files.
1.20      ben      5707:
1.6       hubertf  5708:   * Run make extract && make do-lint in pkgsrc/doc/guide to check the XML
                   5709:     syntax, and fix it if needed.
1.20      ben      5710:
1.6       hubertf  5711:   * Run make in pkgsrc/doc/guide to build the HTML and ASCII version.
1.20      ben      5712:
1.4       hubertf  5713:   * If all is well, run make install-doc to put the generated files into pkgsrc
                   5714:     /doc.
1.20      ben      5715:
1.2       hubertf  5716:   * cvs commit pkgsrc/doc/guide/files
1.20      ben      5717:
1.6       hubertf  5718:   * cvs commit -m re-generate pkgsrc/doc/pkgsrc.{html,txt}
1.20      ben      5719:
1.4       hubertf  5720:   * Until the webserver on www.NetBSD.org is really updated automatically to
                   5721:     pick up changes to the pkgsrc guide automatically, also run make
1.18      xtraeme  5722:     install-htdocs HTDOCSDIR=../../../htdocs (or similar, adjust HTDOCSDIR!).
1.20      ben      5723:
1.4       hubertf  5724:   * cvs commit htdocs/Documentation/pkgsrc
1.20      ben      5725:

CVSweb <webmaster@jp.NetBSD.org>